JP6618732B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the lottery result is referred to as “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, a gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given based on a replay combination winning a predetermined number of times is known (Patent Document 1).

  Further, in recent years, when a specific replay is won, it is determined whether or not to perform a control for invalidating the operation by the player for a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “lock”), and the lock control is performed. A gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given is known (Patent Document 2).

JP 2010-51510 A JP 2009-201820 A

  By the way, for example, a gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1 may be configured to perform an effect that invalidates the operation by the player for a predetermined period by performing lock control as shown in Patent Document 2.

  However, with such a configuration, each time a replay winning combination is won or whether or not to perform lock control is determined according to the number of consecutive winnings, there is a problem that the control burden increases significantly. It was.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and in a gaming machine that grants a privilege based on consecutive winning of a specific role, a game without increasing the control burden regarding the granting of the privilege. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an effect of invalidating a user's operation for a predetermined period.

In the present invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) that displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows and internal winning combination determining means (for example, by the main CPU 93) for determining an internal winning combination. (Internal lottery processing), symbol variation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means. Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping symbol variation, and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means are stopped, On the next game, a combination of symbols corresponding to a specific combination (for example, replay combination) is displayed on the symbol display means. A combination of a re-game operating means (for example, a bonus operation check process and a medal reception / start check process by the main CPU 93) for operating a re-game and a symbol corresponding to the specific combination is displayed on the symbol display means. Re-game operation waiting time setting means for setting a re-game operation waiting time (for example, replay operation recognition time) for operating the re-game until the change of the symbol can be started by the change start control means ( For example, a privilege granting unit that grants a predetermined privilege based on the processing in step S53 in FIG. 65) and the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determination unit (for example, the number of consecutive replays). (e.g., sub-CPU 102) and, informing means for informing said that the replay is activated by the replay operation means (e.g. A speaker), wherein the replay operation wait time setting means can set the replay operation waiting time corresponding to the number of times the particular combination by the internal winning combination determination means is determined continuously, The notification means can notify that the re-game is operated by the re-game operation means during the re-game operation waiting time (for example, an automatic input sound can be output). It is a gaming machine to play.

Further, the present invention is particularly advantageous gaming state Procedure advantageous stop operation is informed to the player (e.g., ART game) advantageously gaming state control means for controlling (e.g., sub-CPU 102) further comprising a pre-Symbol In accordance with the number of times that the specific winning combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the privilege granting means performs a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state as the predetermined privilege. The above-mentioned gaming machine is characterized in that a lottery right (for example, a card) is granted.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform an effect (for example, a lock effect) that invalidates the operation by the player for a predetermined period without increasing the control burden with respect to the provision of the privilege.

Further, the present invention provides a symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination, and a symbol variation for starting variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A start control unit, a symbol variation stop control unit for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit, and the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit by the symbol variation stop control unit are stopped, Based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to is displayed on the symbol display means, a re-game operating means for operating a re-game in the next game, and a symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means Is stopped, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is displayed on the symbol display means. Gosuru special game state control means (e.g., the bonus operation checking process by the main CPU 93, and the sub CPU102 winning operation command reception process by) and, from the display of a combination of the corresponding pattern to the specific role on the symbol display unit Re-game operation waiting time setting means for setting a re-game operation waiting time for operating the re-game until the symbol change can be started by the symbol change start control means, and the internal winning combination determination A privilege granting unit for granting a predetermined privilege based on the number of times the specific combination is continuously determined by the means , wherein the special gaming state control unit determines the internal winning combination in the special gaming state Based on the fact that the transitional combination (for example, RB in BB) is determined as the internal winning combination by the means, the internal winning combination determining means A transition is made to a specific role high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state during BB) with a high probability that a specific role is determined, and in the specific role high probability state, it is displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means. Based on the fact that the change of the symbol is stopped and the symbol combination corresponding to the transition combination is displayed on the symbol display means, the specific winning combination with low probability that the specific winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means is low. Transition to a probable state (for example, RB gaming state during BB), the privilege granting means, in the special gaming state, the number of times that the specific winning combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining means is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more), the predetermined privilege is given, and the re-game operation waiting time setting means is the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Is less than the predetermined number of times, a first re-game operation waiting time (for example, “270” as the value of the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer) is set, and the specified winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. If the number of times determined continuously is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, a second re-game operation waiting time longer than the first re-game operation waiting time (for example, as a value of an automatic insertion interval waiting time timer) "540") is set, and in the specified combination high probability state, the symbol variation displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the symbol variation stop control unit, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the transition combination is the symbol Based on the display on the display means, a lock control means for performing lock control for a specific time shorter than the first re-game operation waiting time (for example, “268” as the value of the lock timer) ( Eg to a Yu TECHNICAL machine, further comprising a game end lock execution process) by the main CPU 93.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in a special gaming state (for example, normal BB), it is difficult to give a predetermined privilege, an effect (for example, a lock effect) that invalidates the operation by the player for a predetermined period. The player can be recognized by the execution time.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in a gaming machine that grants a privilege based on a consecutive winning of a specific combination (for example, a replay combination), the player can increase the control without increasing the control burden. It is possible to produce an effect (for example, a lock effect) that invalidates the operation by a predetermined period.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the example of an external appearance structure in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 3 shows an internal structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and is a perspective view showing a state in which a middle door is closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an internal structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, with a middle door opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the inside of the cabinet in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back surface side of the front door in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the sub control circuit in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the bonus combination in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the replay combination in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small part etc. in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general gaming states in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for BB game states in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for a small combination and replay in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the stop operation order with respect to the internal winning combination in a gaming machine of this embodiment, and a winning combination. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storing area | region in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area | region in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area | region in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area | region in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area | region in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area | region in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area | region in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the PBB medium addition ART game number lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle CZ character lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character A in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character B in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character C in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lip consecutive HP subtraction success / failure lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for Lip consecutive character A in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for Lip consecutive character B in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for Lip consecutive character C in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an ART game number addition success / failure lottery table at the time of ART winning during battle CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART game number lottery table added at the time of ART winning during battle CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success / failure lottery table on the number of ART games in battle CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition ART game number lottery table in battle CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the card acquisition success / failure lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the card classification lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lip consecutive card acquisition success / failure lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lip consecutive card classification lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success / failure lottery table on the number of normal BB ART games in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number game drawing lottery table on normal BB in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the card game addition lottery table at the time of the card remainder in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in item CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows HP subtraction value lottery table during ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during lip continuous ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for REP consecutive enemy A to C for ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for REP continuous enemy D for ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number of ART game addition in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and shows the lottery number lottery table for bell winning. It is a figure which shows the success / failure lottery table on the number of ART games at the time of reaching the number of bell winnings in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition ART game number lottery table at the time of the number-of-bells winning in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table during ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the normal mode transfer lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table at the time of the ART end in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the BB winning sign game number lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 63. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the state management process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an external signal output management process executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 67. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus completion | finish check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus action check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process by control of main CPU in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71. FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing communication data transmission processing executed in the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 71. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power activation process of the sub CPU in the gaming machine of this embodiment. 75 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a sound control task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 74. FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task activated in a mother task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 77. 79 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing executed in the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 78. 80 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79. It is a flowchart which shows the ART game process performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during extra BB performed in the process during ART game shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ART game completion | finish check process performed in the process during ART game shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in battle CZ performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal BB performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in item CZ performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal game performed in the process at the time of the start command reception shown in FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a winning action command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing bonus end command reception processing executed in the effect content determination processing shown in FIG. 79. FIG.

  A pachislot machine that is a specific example of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1, the main structure of the pachislot machine 1 in this embodiment is demonstrated.

[Function flow of pachislot machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. In the pachislot machine 1, each means shown in FIG. 1 executes a necessary process, and a function performed by each means is exhibited, thereby enabling a player to execute a game.

<Input operation detection means>
The input operation detecting means detects an input operation of a game medium such as a medal or a coin by the player. When an operation for inserting a predetermined number of game media (for example, three medals) is detected, detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means described later is permitted. In addition, a predetermined pay line is activated in a symbol display means to be described later (hereinafter, the activated pay line is referred to as an “effective line”). In the present embodiment, the selector 66 that detects insertion of medals by the player and the BET switch 77 that detects operation of the BET button 22 by the player constitute insertion operation detection means. Note that the types of game media that can be detected are not limited to medals, but include coins, tokens, game balls, or electromagnetic game media having a value equivalent to these.

<Starting operation detection means>
The start operation detecting means detects a start operation by the player. When a start operation is detected, symbol variation display by symbol display means described later is started. In addition, a random value used when an internal winning combination determining means described later determines an internal winning combination is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). In addition, an effect random number value used when the effect control means (to be described later) determines the effect is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 32767). In the present embodiment, the start switch 79 that detects the operation of the start lever 23 by the player constitutes a start operation detecting means. Note that the type, number, and numerical range of random numbers to be extracted are not limited to this, and the number of random values that are required in the game can be extracted from a predetermined numerical range. .

<Internal winning combination deciding means>
The internal winning combination determining means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of predetermined combinations. That is, the combination of symbols allowed to be displayed on the active line is determined by the determination of the internal winning combination. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 that refers to various tables and executes the internal lottery process based on the extracted random number value constitutes an internal winning combination determining means. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called “losing” Such a thing is provided.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 can perform control such that the progress of the game is stopped (the player's game operation is invalidated). Such control is referred to as “lock” (or “freeze”). For convenience, the control that stops the progress of the game that is executed at the start of the game is called “game start lock”, and the control that stops the progress of the game that is executed at the end of the game is called “game end lock”. Call. In other words, the “game start lock” is a control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that the operation to the stop button is not effective for a predetermined period after the start lever is operated, “Lock at the end of the game” means that the operation of the game is stopped in the sense that the operation to the bet button or the operation to the start lever is not effective for a predetermined period after the stop button is operated. Control. Of course, the trigger of “lock” is not limited to the above. For example, after the start lever is operated and any one of the stop buttons is operated, the subsequent operation is valid for a predetermined period. It is good also as performing the control which does not become.

  Here, the internal winning combination determination means can determine whether or not to perform “lock” in place of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination by performing lottery based on the extracted random number value. In this case, a plurality of random values are extracted, an internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random values, and whether or not “lock” is performed based on the other random value. It is good.

<Design display means>
The symbol display means variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns. That is, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the symbol fluctuation display is started, and when the stop control is executed by the stop control means described later, the symbol fluctuation display is ended. In the present embodiment, the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the reel display window 4 constitute a symbol display means. Note that the symbol display means is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a symbol image display means (for example, an image display device) that variably displays a plurality of symbol images in a plurality of columns.

<Stop operation detection means>
The stop operation detecting means detects a stop operation by the player. When the stop operation is detected, the symbol change display by the symbol display means is stopped by the stop control means described later. In the present embodiment, the stop switch substrate 80 that detects the operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R by the player constitutes a stop operation detecting means.

  The first stop operation that is performed first when all the reels are rotating is the first stop operation, the stop operation that is performed after the first stop operation is the second stop operation, and the second stop operation is performed next. The stop operation that is performed is referred to as a third stop operation.

<Stop control means>
The stop control unit controls the stop of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit. That is, when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the symbol display on the symbol display means is stopped based on the stop control information set according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Control. In this embodiment, when the stop button 19L, 19C, 19R is operated by the player, a reel stop control process for stopping and controlling the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed with reference to various stop control information. The main control circuit 91 that constitutes the stop control means.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 1 symbol. The maximum number of sliding pieces is not limited to these and can be set as appropriate.

  The stop control means uses the specified time to display the symbol combinations as much as possible along the active line for the symbol combinations permitted to be displayed according to the determination result of the internal winning combination. The rotation of the reel is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  On the other hand, depending on the determination result of the internal winning combination, the maximum sliding piece is used so that the combination of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed will not be displayed along the active line using the specified time. Stop reel rotation within a range of numbers.

  Further, the stop control means changes the combination of symbols displayed by the determined internal winning combination in accordance with a predetermined stop operation order (for example, an order in which a plurality of stop buttons are operated). In some cases, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed with reference to the predetermined stop operation sequence.

<Winning determination means>
The winning determination means determines whether or not there is a winning according to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means. That is, when the change display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control means, the winning or non-winning of the combination is determined based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 that refers to a symbol combination table or the like and executes a winning search process based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means constitutes a winning determination means.

<Profit grant means>
The profit granting means grants a profit corresponding to the winning combination of symbols when the winning determination means determines that there is a winning. That is, according to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, a corresponding profit is given to the player. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 that executes a medal payout process based on the result of the winning search process constitutes a profit granting unit. In the case where the benefit to be given is given by the control of the sub-control circuit 101, the sub-control circuit 101 constitutes a profit grant unit.

  Here, the profit granted by the profit granting means includes the medal payout, the re-game operation that allows the same amount of game media as the current game to be automatically inserted, and the game can be played again. Re-play high-probability state (replay time) that increases the winning probability of winning combination, special gaming state (bonus) that increases the winning probability of internal winning combination related to the payout of medals, stop operation appropriate for the player By informing the above procedure, the operation of a specific gaming state (assist time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the payout of medals increases can be exemplified. In addition, the profit which a profit provision means gives is not restricted to this.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, when the player's throwing operation is detected by the throwing operation detecting means and the player's starting operation is detected by the starting operation detecting means, the internal winning combination deciding means is used by the internal winning combination determining means. Is determined, and symbol display by the symbol display means is started. Then, when the stop operation of the player is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the change control display of the symbol display means by the stop control means is stopped, and the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means is the winning determination means When it is determined that the symbol combination is related to winning, a profit corresponding to the symbol combination is given by the profit granting means. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine.

<Production control means>
The effect control means performs lottery based on the extracted effect random number and other information (for example, information related to the internal winning combination), and determines what is to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect control means controls the effect execution means described later so that the determined effect is appropriately executed. In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 that refers to various tables and determines the effect content based on at least the extracted effect random number and executes the effect according to the determined effect content is the effect control. Configure the means. It should be noted that the above-described “lock” can also be regarded as an aspect of the effect. In this case, the main control circuit 91 constitutes effect control means.

  In addition, when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, the effect control means determines an effect for notifying the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information regarding the stop operation order and information regarding the game history). In this case, the effect control means can also be referred to as notification control means.

<Direction execution means>
The effect execution means executes the effect determined by the effect control means. That is, it means various devices used for effects such as a display device or lamp that performs an effect appealing to the eye, a speaker that performs an effect appealing to the hearing, or an effect button that performs an effect appealing to the sense of touch. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11, the LED 85, the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R constitute an effect execution means. Note that the effect execution means is not limited to these, and may be a movable body (an accessory) provided at a position visible from the front side of the pachislot machine 1, or a plurality of reels (for example, The effect may be executed by causing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) to be variably displayed in an effect mode different from the normal symbol change display mode.

  In addition, when the effect execution means determines an effect for notifying the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information regarding the stop operation order and information regarding the game history) by the effect control means, The information is notified to the player. In this case, the effect execution means can also be referred to as notification means.

[Pachislot machine structure]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Appearance structure>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The exterior body 2 of the pachislot machine 1 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Moreover, the handle 7 is provided in the both sides | surfaces of the cabinet 2a. The handle 7 is a recess that is put on when carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at equal intervals along the circumferential direction.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 forms the upper part of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. The liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed on the lower side of the upper panel unit 10 and executes an effect by displaying an image.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The symbol display area 4 is arranged on the front side superimposed on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration capable of transmitting through the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the display window. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is also referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the reel display window 4 has an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage within the frame among a plurality of types of symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each area. Further, one or a plurality of lines obtained by combining any one of predetermined areas among the three areas including the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage facing the reels 3L, 3C, 3R of the reel display window 4 are defined as effective lines. Will be. In the present embodiment, a line (center line) formed by combining middle regions facing the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is defined as an effective line.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the pedestal portion 12. The frame member 13 has a reel display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button attachment portion 15.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously below the reel display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16.

  The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b. In addition, the frame member 13 includes a sheet placement portion 17 that faces the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. And between the sheet | seat mounting part 17 and the window cover 16, the sheet | seat member (information sheet) in which the information regarding a game was described is arrange | positioned. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without unevenness or gaps.

  The window cover 16 that constitutes the information sheet mounting portion is a non-removable from the front side of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the inside of 1. The replacement of the information sheet will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. However, the information display window according to the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided below the reel display window and may not be continuous with the reel display window. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 may be formed as two openings arranged in the vertical direction.

  The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is formed on a plane facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R pass. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are associated with the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  The stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R indicate an example of operation means that is an operation target of the player. In addition, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal slot 21, a BET button 22, and a start lever 23 as operation means to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 21 is provided to accept a medal dropped from the outside by the player. The medals accepted by the medal slot 21 are inserted into one game with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the specified number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function).

  The BET button 22 is provided for determining the number of coins to be inserted into one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. The start lever 23 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

  Further, a 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 24 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. .

  Side panel units 26 </ b> L and 26 </ b> R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12. Each of the side panel units 26L and 26R has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the side panel unit 26L. This checkout button 27 is provided to pull out medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  A lower panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12. The waist panel unit 31 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 51 described later to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32 are stored in the medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided for outputting sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

<Internal structure>
3 and 4 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 4 shows a state where the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the inside of the cabinet 2a. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the back side of the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a includes a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 5). A cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed on the upper side inside the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is attached to the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via attachment brackets 43L and 43R. The cabinet side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting sound effects.

  A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The cabinet side relay board 44 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, a game medal auxiliary storage switch (not shown), a medal The wiring connecting the payout count switch (not shown) is relayed.

  An amplifier board 45 that controls the output of sound from the cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed in the center of the cabinet 2a. The amplifier board 45 is attached to a mounting shelf 46 fixed to the left and right side plates 20c, 20d.

  Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 47 is disposed on the right side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The external concentrated terminal plate 47 is attached to the right side plate 20d of the cabinet 2a. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub power supply device 48 is disposed on the left side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply device 48 supplies power with an AC voltage of 100 V to the power supply device 53 described later. Further, the power of the AC voltage 100V is converted into the power of the DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 45.

  A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed on the lower side of the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 20b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can store a large amount of medals and can discharge them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button is pressed and the medals are settled. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout port 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate 20b.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 7). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 20c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 3, 4 and 6, the middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and is configured such that the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) can be opened and closed from the back side. Door stoppers 41a, 41b, and 41c are provided on the upper and lower portions of the middle door 41. The door stoppers 41a, 41b and 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 in a state where the reel display window 4 is closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b, and 41c to release the middle door 41 from being fixed.

  A main control board case 55 that houses a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) and three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached to the middle door 41. Stepping motors are connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 4, when the middle door 41 is opened, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17, an information sheet on which information related to the game is described is arranged. This information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened and the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. The When exchanging information sheets, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

  The main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing a setting value in the pachislot machine 1 or confirming a setting value in the pachislot machine 1. In the present embodiment, a main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55.

  The main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. A specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  A sub control board case 57 that houses the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7) is disposed above the middle door 41. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 constitutes the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying images. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later.

  A center speaker 58 is disposed above the sub control board case 57. A fan 59 is disposed on the left side of the center speaker 58 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. That is, the fan 59 is disposed at the upper part on the back side of the front door 2b. The fan 59 blows air downward and cools the interior of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub relay board 61 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 57 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, it is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the board disposed around the sub-control board 72. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board | substrate 72, LED board 62A, 62B mentioned later is mentioned.

  The LED boards 62A and 62B are disposed above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2b. These LED boards 62A and 62B cause an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 85 (see FIG. 7), which shows one specific example of the light source, to emit light according to the effects executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 8). Display the blinking pattern. The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED boards in addition to the LED boards 62A and 62B.

  Below the sub-relay board 61, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 is disposed. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores the opening / closing history of the middle door 41. When the middle door 41 is opened, a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 is output to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101).

  Below the middle door 41, a board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged. The board speaker 64 faces the waist panel unit 31 (see FIG. 2), and the lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

  A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are disposed above the lower speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides an appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (not shown) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  Further, a door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed in a region below the reel display window 4 and opened and closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 4). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 7), a selector 66, and a game operation display board 81. It is a board | substrate which relays wiring with (refer FIG. 7). Examples of the various buttons and switches include a BET button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a start switch 79, and the like, which will be described later.

[Control system of pachislot machine]
Next, a control system provided in the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot machine 1.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 disposed on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 disposed on the front door 2b. The main control board 71 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 56, an external concentration terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power supply board 53b of the power supply 53. It is connected. The setting key switch 56, the external concentration terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the external concentration terminal board 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, description thereof will be omitted.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 penetrates a later-described switch through hole of the medal auxiliary storage 52. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  A power switch 53 a is connected to the power supply board 53 b of the power supply device 53. The power switch 53a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control board 71 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and a door relay terminal board 68. The sub relay board 61 is connected. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch substrate 80 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 19L, 19C, 19R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 24 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 24 and an LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. For example, the LED 82 lights a mark for displaying the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, and the like.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. A sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 are connected to the sub control board 72 through a sub relay board 61. Since these LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to the center speaker 58, the board speaker 64, and the lower speakers 65L and 65R. The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to the cannet side speaker 42 together with the amplifier board 45.

  The sub-control board 72 is connected to a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing production images (video), sound, LED substrates 62A and 62B, other LED substrates (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control circuit 91 includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, for example, with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) including a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols. Therefore, for example, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 and the symbols within the range up to four symbols ahead of the symbol of the reel display window 4 It becomes a symbol that can be stopped in the middle.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. Is included. In addition, a drawing control task for controlling the display of video by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 6) based on the determined contents of the presentation, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by a light source such as the LED 85, and the speakers 42, 58, 64. , 65L, 65R, etc., a voice control task for controlling the output of sound by a speaker.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Also included are a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to the light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes a sound such as BGM to be output from a speaker such as speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R in accordance with the sound data specified by the production contents. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the turning on and off of the light source such as the LED 85 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

[Changes in gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 will be described. As the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 93 sets the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, RT3 gaming state or RT4 gaming state) and the BB gaming state (PBB gaming state, BB RT0 gaming state). , The game state of RT2 during BB or RB game state during BB) is changed.

<Transition of general gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 10, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state are defined as general gaming states. Note that “RT” is an abbreviation for “replay time”, and the RT0 to RT4 game states are game states for identifying that the winning probabilities of the replay combination that is a replay actuating combination are different.

  In the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, the winning probability of the replay role is set to “8978/65536” (see FIG. 16), and in the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state, the winning probability of the replay role is set to “41792/65536”. It is set (see FIG. 16). In the RT4 gaming state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to “12000/65536”. That is, the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state are the replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay role is relatively lower than the RT2-4 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state. Is a replay high probability state (high RT game state) in which the winning probability of the replay role is relatively high compared to the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the RT4 game state. The RT4 gaming state has a relatively high probability of winning the replay role compared to the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, but the replaying probability of the replay role is relatively low compared to the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state. Medium probability state (medium RT gaming state).

  In addition, the winning probability of a replay role in each RT gaming state (including a PBB gaming state, a BB RT0 gaming state, a BB RT2 gaming state, or a BB RB gaming state to be described later) is limited to the above (or later). However, it can be set as appropriate. For example, the winning probability of the replay role in the RT3 gaming state is set to be higher than the winning probability of the replay role in the RT2 gaming state, and the winning probability of the replay role gradually increases from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is good also as comprising. Further, for example, the winning probability of the replaying role in the RT4 gaming state may be set to be the same or equivalent winning probability of the replaying role in the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state.

  When the pachislot machine 1 is first installed in the amusement hall, when a backup error of the main RAM 95 occurs in the pachislot machine 1, all storage areas are initialized (initial state), and the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is changed In the case of the game (after setting change), or when the PBB gaming state, the BB RT0 gaming state, or the BB RB gaming state, which will be described later, is ended, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, or the RT3 gaming state, if any combination of symbols of RT1 transition lip 1 to 16 described later wins, or any combination of symbols of RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8 is effective When displayed on the line, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state.

  In the RT1 gaming state, when a combination of symbols of RT2 transition lip 1 or RT2 transition lip 2 described later wins, the gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state. Further, in the RT2 gaming state, when a combination of symbols of RT3 transition lip 1 or RT3 transition lip 2 described later wins, the gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state.

  In the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, or the RT3 gaming state, when a bonus combination that is a bonus operating combination (in this embodiment, either PBB or BB1 to 4 described later) is internally won The game state is shifted to the RT4 game state. Note that the bonus combination is maintained in the internal winning state from the time of internal winning until the prize is won. This is called “carryover”, and the bonus combination is also called “carryover”. Also, the RT4 gaming state, which is the internal winning state of the bonus combination, is also called “between flags”. The bonus combination is drawn only in the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, and is not drawn in the RT4 gaming state and the BB gaming state described later (except for the BB middle RB in the RT0 gaming state during BB).

  In addition, the transition opportunity of each RT game state is not restricted to what was mentioned above, It can set suitably. For example, after one transition opportunity is established, the RT gaming state may be transitioned with another transition opportunity being that a predetermined number of games have been performed. In addition, only a part of the above-described transition opportunities can be employed.

<BB game state transition>
As shown in FIG. 10, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a PBB gaming state, a BB RT0 gaming state, a BB RT2 gaming state, or a BB RB gaming state is defined as the BB gaming state. “BB” is an abbreviation for “big bonus”, and “RB” is an abbreviation for “regular bonus”. Further, “BB” is also referred to as “an accessory continuous actuating device related to a first type special accessory”, and “RB” is also referred to as a “first type special accessory”. In addition, it is good also as employ | adopting "a 2nd type special accessory" as "RB" as "BB" using "a continuous action apparatus concerning a 2nd type special accessory". The PBB gaming state and the BB in-between RB gaming state are gaming states that are advantageous to the player because they have a relatively high probability of winning a small role as compared to the general gaming state. In the BB gaming state, during the BB gaming state, the number of medals exceeding the prescribed number (297 in the PBB gaming state, 44 in the BB RT0 gaming state, the BB RT2 gaming state, and the BB RB gaming state) is paid out. Exit if there is.

  In the RT4 gaming state, when a combination of PBB symbols to be described later wins, the gaming state is shifted to the PBB gaming state. Also, in the PBB gaming state, when the medals exceeding the specified number (297) are paid out, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the RT4 gaming state, when any combination of symbols BB1 to BB 4 to be described later wins, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state during BB. In addition, in the BB RT0 gaming state, when there are medals that exceed the specified number (44), the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state. In addition, in the BB RT0 gaming state, when the RB in the BB is internally won before the medals exceeding the prescribed number (44) are paid out, the gaming state is shifted to the BB RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state during BB is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay role is relatively higher than the RT0 gaming state during BB (see FIG. 17).

  In the BB RT2 gaming state, when medals have been paid out exceeding the specified number (44), the gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state. That is, in the BB gaming state that shifts based on winning of a combination of symbols of any one of BB1 to BB described later, the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) based on the internal winning of the RB during BB When the BB gaming state is ended as it is, the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) is taken over even in the general gaming state after the BB gaming state ends. On the other hand, in the BB RT2 gaming state, if the BB winning RB is won before the medals exceeding the specified number (44) are paid out, the BB gaming RB gaming state is entered and the BB RB gaming state is entered. When the medals exceeding the specified number (44) are paid out, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state. That is, even if the RB in the BB shifts to the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) based on the internal winning, if the RB in the BB wins, the general game after the end of the BB gaming state The state becomes a replay low probability state (low RT gaming state).

  Note that the RB gaming state during BB ends based on the winning of 8 small roles or 12 games, but in this embodiment, in most cases, Before the end condition is satisfied, the end condition of the BB gaming state (the medal payout exceeding the specified number (44)) has been satisfied, so RT0 after the end of the BB gaming state in BB The game state is to be shifted. Therefore, when the end condition for the BB gaming state is not yet satisfied when the end condition for the BB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state is changed based on the fact that the end condition for the BB gaming state is satisfied. Transition to the RT0 gaming state during BB will be made. As described above, the RT0 gaming state during BB (including the RT2 gaming state during BB) is also referred to as a “BB general gaming state” because it is not shifted to the BB gaming state during the BB gaming state.

[Data table stored in main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 11 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions.

  Symbol position data “0” to “19” indicates the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “Red 7”, “Red BAR”, “White BAR”, “Black BAR”, “Bell”, “Replay 1”, “Replay 2”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry” and “Blank” Is included.

  Here, “Replay 1” and “Replay 2” only need to be identifiable as the main CPU 93 being internally different symbols, and in this embodiment, the symbols that the player can recognize like the same symbols. It is said. Hereinafter, “Replay 1” and “Replay 2” are collectively referred to as “Replay”.

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 12, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and in the present embodiment, it is distinguished by 2 bytes (16 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 12 represents symbol codes as data for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 11 has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, but is actually stored in the main ROM 94. The symbol arrangement table shows the arrangement of symbol codes for identifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are “red 7”, “red BAR”, “white BAR”, “black BAR”, “bell”, “replay 1”, “replay 2” as described above. , “Watermelon”, “Cherry” and “Blank”.

  In the symbol code table, “1” is assigned as the symbol code for the “red 7” symbol. Also, “2” is assigned as the symbol code for the “white BAR” symbol. Also, “3” is assigned as the symbol code for the “black BAR” symbol.

  Similarly, symbol codes “4” to “10” are assigned to symbols of “bell”, “replay 1”, “replay 2”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “blank”, respectively.

<Design combination table>
In the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, a winning action flag and a payout number are associated with a symbol combination identified by storage area identification data represented by 16 bytes.

  The winning action flag is data assigned corresponding to a combination of unique symbols for representing a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as “winning winning combination”), and includes 1 byte (8 bits) data and a storage area type. It is out. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data. One byte data includes data corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbols. Each symbol combination is distinguished by the storage area type and 1-byte data.

  In the symbol combination tables shown in FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, the names (contents) of winning combinations are associated with the winning action flags for the combinations of symbols for easy understanding of the invention.

  The number of payouts is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player corresponding to each symbol combination. When the combination of symbols arranged along the valid line matches the “combination of symbols” in the symbol combination table, the medal payout by driving the hopper device 51 or the number of credits is counted based on the corresponding payout number. The credit counter is added.

  FIG. 13 shows a symbol combination table relating to a bonus combination (including RB in BB). When the symbol combination shown in FIG. 13 is displayed on the active line, the medal is not paid out, but a bonus operating combination is won. That is, when the bonus combination is won, the game state shifts to the BB gaming state (in the case of RB during BB, the RB gaming state during BB).

  In FIG. 13, when the combination of symbols “red 7-red 7-red 7” indicating the winning combination of “PBB” is displayed on the active line in the general gaming state (RT4 gaming state), Although there is no payout, the player has won the PBB and shifts to the PBB gaming state. Note that “PBB” is a “determining role” that determines the transition to an ART game in a normal game, which will be described later, and determines the addition of the number of ART sets or the number of ART games in the ART game.

  A combination of symbols “Red 7-Red 7-Red BAR” indicating a winning combination of “BB1,” a combination of symbols “Red 7-Red 7-White BAR” indicating a winning combination of “BB2,” “BB3” A combination of symbols of “white BAR-white BAR-white BAR” indicating a winning combination or “white BAR—white BAR—red BAR” indicating a winning combination of “BB4” When displayed on the active line in the general gaming state (RT4 gaming state), no medal is paid out, but it means that BB has been won, and the state shifts to the BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB).

  Here, the combination of symbols “BB1” and “BB3” is composed of symbols “red 7” and “red BAR” or “white BAR”. That is, it is a combination of symbols composed of symbols of the same color. The combination of symbols “BB2” and “BB4” is composed of “red 7” and “white BAR”, or “white BAR” and “red BAR”. That is, it is a combination of symbols composed of different color symbols. Hereinafter, “BB1” and “BB3” are collectively referred to as “same color bonus”, and “BB2” and “BB4” are collectively referred to as “different color bonus”.

  When the combination of symbols “White BAR-Blank-Blank” indicating the winning combination of “RB in BB” is displayed on the active line in the RT2 gaming state during BB, no medal is paid out, but in BB RB is won and the RB gaming state during BB is entered. “RB in RB” is also called “JAC”.

  FIG. 14 shows a symbol combination table related to the replay combination. When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 14 is displayed on the active line, no medal is paid out, but a winning combination of re-game is won. That is, when the replay combination wins, the replay can be performed in the next game.

  In FIG. 14, a combination of symbols “Replay 1-Replay 1-Replay 1” indicating the winning combination of “Normal Lip 1” and “Replay 1-Replay 2-Replay 1” indicating the winning combination of “Normal Lip 2”. A combination of symbols, “Replay 1-Replay 1-Replay 2” indicating a winning combination of “Normal Lip 3”, “Replay 1-Replay 2-Replay 2” indicating a winning combination of “Normal Lip 4” A combination of symbols, “Replay 2-Replay 2-Replay 2” indicating a winning combination of “Normal Lip 5”, and “Replay 2-Replay 1-Replay 2” indicating a winning combination of “Normal Lip 6” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols “Replay 2-Replay 2-Replay 1” indicating a winning combination of “Normal Lip 7”, or “Replay 2-Replay 1-Replay 1” indicating a winning combination of “Normal Lip 8” Design If the combination of any of the symbol combination is displayed on the pay line is, the symbol "replay" are aligned in the middle in the display window 4.

  “Bell-Bell-Red 7” symbol combination indicating “RT1 transition Lip 1”, “Bell-Bell-Watermelon” symbol combination indicating “RT1 transition Lip 2”, “RT1 transition “Blip-Bell-Black BAR” symbol combination indicating “Lip 3” winning combination, “Red 7-Watermelon-Bell” symbol combination indicating “RT1 Transition Lip 4”, or “RT1 Transition Lip” When any symbol combination of “White BAR-Watermelon Bell” indicating the winning combination “5” is displayed on the active line, “Replay” is displayed in the lower or upper row in the display window 4. The design is aligned. Note that the symbols “RT1 transition lip 6” to “RT1 transition lip 16” are defined as combinations of symbols having the same performance, although the symbols “Replay” are not arranged in the lower or upper portion in the display window 4. ing. If any combination of symbols “RT1 transition lip 1” to “RT1 transition lip 16” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

  The combination of the symbol “Replay 1-Watermelon Bell” indicating the winning combination of “RT2 Transition Lip 1” or the combination of the symbol “Replay 2-Watermelon Bell” indicating the winning combination of “RT2 Transition Lip 2” is valid. When displayed on the line, the gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

  A combination of symbols “Bell-Replay1-Bell” indicating a winning combination of “RT3 Transition Lip 1” or a combination of symbols “Bell-Replay 2-Bell” indicating a winning combination of “RT3 Transition Lip 2” is valid. When displayed on the line, the symbols “Replay” are aligned in the display window 4 to the right and the gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, only the above-mentioned center line is defined as an effective line, but a combination of symbols related to the replay role (for example, RT1 transition lip 1 to 5 and RT3 transition lip 1 and 2). 14 is configured as shown in FIG. 14, and the combinations of symbols relating to small roles described later in the description of FIG. 15 (for example, cross-down bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4 and cross-up bell) As a result of the configuration, five lines (center line aligned in the middle, top line aligned in the upper stage, bottom line aligned in the lower stage, cross-down line aligned in the lower right, and cross-up line aligned in the upper right) are effective lines. It is possible to impress the player as if.

  When the combination of symbols of “Black BAR-Black BAR-Black BAR” indicating the winning combination of “BAR uniform lip” is displayed on the active line, the transition to the ART game is confirmed in the normal game described later, In an ART game, an additional number of ART sets or ART games is determined. That is, the “BAR matching lip” is a “determined combination”. Note that the combination of the symbols “BAR-matched lip” may not be displayed on the active line depending on the timing of the player's stop operation (the “missing-out” described later may occur). A combination of symbols “BAR Follow Lip 1” to “BAR Follow Lip 12” that is allowed to be displayed on the active line together with the combination of symbols is defined. However, as will be described later, the symbol combinations “BAR Follow Lip 1” to “BAR Follow Lip 12” are allowed to be displayed on the active line even if they are not combined with the symbol combination “BAR Match Lip”. ("BAR-matched fake rip"). In this case, when the player performs the stop operation aiming at the “black BAR” symbol, the expectation that the combination of the “BAR uniform lip” symbols may be maintained is maintained until the third stop operation. Is possible.

  FIG. 15 shows a symbol combination table relating to a small combination or the like where medals are paid out. When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 15 is displayed on the active line except for “RT1 transition symbol 1” to “RT1 transition symbol 8”, the number of medals associated with the symbol combination is displayed. To be paid out. However, the combination of the symbols “RT1 transition symbol 1” to “RT1 transition symbol 8” may be defined as a combination of symbols relating to a small combination with a medal (for example, one) payout.

  In FIG. 15, when the symbol combination “Replay 1-Bell-Replay 1” indicating the winning combination of “Crossdown Bell 1” is displayed on the active line, “Bell” ”And the 9 medals are paid out. “Crossdown bell 2” to “crossdown bell 4” are the same as “cross down bell 1”.

  When the combination of symbols “Replay 1-Replay 1-Cherry” indicating the winning combination of “Upper bell 1” is displayed on the active line, the symbol “Bell” is aligned in the upper row in the display window 4, Nine medals are paid out. “Upper bell 2” to “upper bell 4” are the same as “upper bell 1”.

  When a combination of symbols “Watermelon Bell-Cherry” indicating the winning combination of “Cross-up Bell” is displayed on the active line, the symbol “Bell” is aligned in the display window 4 in the upward direction. A medal is paid out. When the combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” symbols indicating the winning combination of “Middle-level bell” is displayed on the active line, the “Bell” symbols are aligned in the middle level in the display window 4 and nine sheets are displayed. Medals are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols “Replay 1-Blank-Bell” indicating the winning combination of “Left Follow Small Bonus 1” is displayed on the active line, one medal is paid out. “Left follow small role 2” to “left follow small role 16” are the same as “left follow small role 1”.

  When a combination of symbols “red 7-bell-bell” indicating a winning combination of “medium follow small role 1” is displayed on the active line, one medal is paid out. “Middle follow small role 2” to “left follow small role 12” are the same as “middle follow small role 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of “Red 7-Cherry-Bell” indicating the winning combination of “Right follow small role 1” is displayed on the active line, one medal is paid out. “Right follow small role 2” to “left follow small role 4” are the same as “right follow small role 1”.

  As will be described later in the description of FIG. 20, for example, “left middle right bell 1” is determined as an internal winning combination as “push order small role”. When the stop operation is performed in the “right” stop operation order, the stop operation order is correct and the combination of symbols of “upper bell 1” to “upper bell 4” is preferentially displayed. The stop control is performed and nine medals are paid out. However, when the stop operation is performed in any other stop operation order, the stop operation order is incorrect, and therefore “upper bell 1” to “upper stage”. In order not to win any of “Bell 4”, “Left Follow Minor 1”, “Left Follow Minor 2”, “Left Follow Minor 5”, “Left Follow Minor 6”, “Left Follow Minor 9” ”,“ Left follow small role 10 ”,“ Left follow small role 13 ”and“ Left So that the stop control so that one or more combinations of symbols of the row Small Win 14 "is preferentially displayed is performed. In addition, since the “following small role” generates “missing out” which will be described later, in this case, no medal is paid out, and any of “RT1 transition symbol 1” to “RT1 transition symbol 8” which will be described later. The combination of symbols will be displayed.

  The combination of symbols “Cherry-Black BAR-Cherry” indicating the winning combination of “Middle Stage Cherry 1” or “Cherry-Cherry-Cherry” indicating the winning combination of “Middle Stage Cherry 2” is on the active line. When displayed, one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols “black BAR-black BAR-red BAR” indicating a winning combination of “strong cherry 1” is displayed on the active line, two medals are paid out. “Strong Cherry 2” to “Strong Cherry 10” are the same as “Strong Cherry 1”.

  When the symbol combination “black BAR-black BAR-cherry” indicating the winning combination of “weak cherry 1” is displayed on the active line, two medals are paid out. “Weak cherry 2” and “weak cherry 3” are the same as “weak cherry 1”. Note that the combination of the symbols “strong cherry” and “weak cherry” is configured such that the symbol “cherry” is displayed in the lower part of the display window 4 corresponding to the left reel 3L.

  When the symbol combination “red BAR-watermelon-replay 2” indicating the winning combination of “watermelon 1” is displayed on the active line, four medals are paid out. “Watermelon 2” to “Watermelon 4” are the same as “Watermelon 1”. As for the combination of symbols of “Watermelon 1”, the symbols of “Watermelon” are aligned to the right in the display window 4, and the combination of symbols of “Watermelon 2” and “Watermelon 3” are lowered to the right in the display window 4. The “watermelon” symbol is aligned, and the “watermelon 4” symbol combination is configured such that the “watermelon” symbol is aligned in the middle of the display window 4.

  A combination of “red BAR-black BAR-blank” symbol indicating a winning combination of “special small role 1” or a combination of “white BAR-blank-black BAR” symbol indicating a winning combination of “special small role 2” Is displayed on the active line, one medal is paid out.

  When the symbol combination “Replay 1-Cherry Bell” indicating the winning combination of “RT1 transition symbol 1” is displayed along the active line, the medal is not paid out and the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. Migrate to “RT1 transition symbol 2” to “RT1 transition symbol 8” are the same as “RT1 transition symbol 1”. The “RT1 transition symbol” is not strictly a “winner” but is a part of the combination of “losing” symbol, but the main CPU 93 recognizes that the “RT1 transition symbol” is displayed. Is defined in the symbol combination table shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described names are assigned to the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, the combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and the combination of symbols related to the small combination, etc. The name does not necessarily limit the role of the combination of symbols.

  Further, without providing the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, for example, the main CPU 93 performs control for identifying the symbol combination displayed on the active line using the symbol code shown in FIG. 11. May be. That is, the main CPU 93 only needs to be able to identify the combination of symbols displayed on the active line, and the control method is not limited to that using the symbol combination table.

<Internal lottery table>
In the plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, a lottery value and a data pointer for each gaming state are associated with a winning number. The internal lottery table is normally stored in the main ROM 94 for each set value (for example, set values 1 to 6) of the pachislot machine 1. However, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, explanation will be made using one internal lottery table.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data pointer (that is, the internal winning combination) associated with the winning number is determined. If “0” is defined as the lottery value, the data pointer (that is, the internal winning combination) associated with the winning number is not determined in the gaming state (that is, the lottery) Will not be). When the number of times of determination processing for determining whether the result of the subtraction has become negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery processing is “lost”.

  The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”. In the present embodiment, by properly using a plurality of types of internal lottery tables, the type of internal winning combination to be determined and the winning probability are varied, and as a result, the expectation held by the player is undulated.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of a lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later.

  In other words, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the small combination / replay winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18 and the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. . For the data pointer, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

  The method of the internal lottery process is not limited to the above-described method. For example, a lottery corresponding to each winning number is selected from a predetermined random number range “0 to 65535”. Internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding values, and determining whether the result of the addition has become a predetermined value (for example, a value determined in advance for each winning number).

  Further, without providing the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, for example, the main CPU 93 may perform control for determining the internal winning combination by performing a predetermined calculation on the random number for lottery. . That is, the main CPU 93 only needs to be able to determine the internal winning combination based on the extracted random number for lottery, and the control method is not limited to that using the internal lottery table.

(Internal lottery table for general gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 16, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state referred to in the general gaming state shows the lottery value of each winning number in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state. It stipulates. In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, in the winning numbers “1” to “38”, the bonus combination (excluding RB in the BB) is won alone or overlapping with the replay combination or small combination, and the winning number “39” In “63”, the replay role is won, in the winning numbers “64” to “83”, the small role is won, and in the winning number “84”, the RB in the BB is elected alone. . In this embodiment, the general lottery state internal lottery table and the BB gaming state internal lottery table described later have the same configuration, but may have different configurations.

  In the general game state internal lottery table, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “1” to “38” are common to the RT0 to RT3 game states, and are different only in the RT4 game state. This is because the RT4 gaming state is the internal winning state of the bonus combination, and the bonus combination is not randomly drawn. However, since the lottery values of the small roles that should have been determined in the winning numbers “1” to “38” are assigned and assigned in the winning numbers “76” to “82”, the gaming state RT0 to RT4 There is no change in the winning probability of small roles.

  In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “39” to “63” are different for each of the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. That is, the type of replay combination and the winning probability that are drawn in each of the RT0 to RT4 gaming states vary. In the RT0 gaming state, the lottery value “8318” is assigned to the winning number “39”, the lottery value “655” is assigned to the winning number “40”, and the lottery value “0” is assigned to the winning numbers “41” to “63”. "Is assigned.

  In the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value “33” is assigned to the winning number “39”, the lottery value “1490” is assigned to the winning numbers “41” to “46”, and the winning numbers “40” and “47” to “47” are assigned. The lottery value “0” is assigned to “63”. In the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value “17” is assigned to the winning number “39”, the lottery value “64” is assigned to the winning number “40”, and the lottery value “4991” is assigned to the winning numbers “47” to “52”. Is assigned, the lottery value “1960” is assigned to the winning numbers “53” to “58”, and the lottery value “0” is assigned to the winning numbers “41” to “46” and “59” to “63”. Yes. In the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value “2188” is assigned to the winning number “39”, the lottery value “13168” is assigned to the winning numbers “59” to “61”, and the lottery value “63” is assigned to the winning number “62”. Is assigned, the lottery value “32” is assigned to the winning number “63”, and the lottery value “0” is assigned to the winning numbers “40” to “58”. In the RT gaming state, the lottery value “12000” is assigned to the winning number “39”, and the lottery value “0” is assigned to the winning numbers “40” to “63”.

  In the general game state internal lottery table, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “64” to “75” are common to the RT0 to RT4 game states. Further, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “76” to “82” are common to the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, and are different only in the RT4 gaming state. Also, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “83” and “84” are common in the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. The winning number “83” is a winning number that is won only in the PBB gaming state and the RB gaming state during BB, and the winning number “84” is a winning number that is won only in the RT0 gaming state during BB.

(BB internal gaming lottery table)
As shown in FIG. 17, the internal lottery table for the BB gaming state referred to in the BB gaming state is a lottery for each winning number in the PBB gaming state, the BB RT0 gaming state, the BB RT2 gaming state, and the BB RB gaming state. Specifies the value. Here, since the configurations of the winning numbers “1” to “84” are the same as those in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the internal lottery table for the BB gaming state shown in FIG. 17, the winning numbers “2”, “4” to “11”, “13” to “20” in the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 gaming state during BB, “22” to “29”, “31” to “38” are assigned the same lottery value as the lottery value in the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, which are the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 during BB. It does not indicate that a bonus combination (excluding RB in BB) can be determined as an internal winning combination in the gaming state, but is determined to overlap with a bonus combination (excluding RB in BB) in the RT0 to RT3 gaming state. The replay combination or small combination indicates that the lottery is performed with the same winning probability. Therefore, as in the RT4 gaming state and the BB gaming state during BB, all the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “1” to “38” are set to “0”, and the winning numbers “1” to “38” can be determined. The lottery values of the small roles that were supposed to be added may be added and assigned in the winning numbers “76” to “82”.

<Internal winning combination decision table for small role / replay>
In the internal winning combination determination table for a small combination / replay shown in FIG. 18, data for identifying a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted is associated with the data pointer for small combination / replay. ing.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay shown in FIG. 18, the data of the internal winning combination for the data pointer for the small role / replay is omitted for convenience, the name (contents) of the winning combination and the internal winning combination. Is associated with the name (remarks).

  Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to associate a plurality of symbol combinations (winning operation flags) for which winning is permitted with one data pointer. Thereby, it is possible to permit winning of a combination of a plurality of symbols (winning operation flag) in one internal lottery process. These internal lottery methods are called “simultaneous winning” method and “overlapping winning” method.

  In the present embodiment, one symbol combination (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted can be defined as “internal winning combination”, and winning is permitted for one data pointer. Although a combination of a plurality of symbols (winning operation flag) can be defined as an internal winning combination, in FIGS. 18 to 20, the latter is defined as an internal winning combination.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “0” is associated with “losing”. That is, regarding the replay combination and the small combination, any combination of symbols related to winning is not allowed to be displayed on the active line.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “1” for the small role / replay indicates “normal lip 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “normal lips 1 to 8” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “2” for the small role / replay indicates “normal lip 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “normal lip 1-8”, “BAR matching lip” and “BAR follow lip 1-12” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “3” for the small role / replay indicates “left middle right RT2 transition lip” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As combinations of symbols (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1 to 8” and “RT2 transition lip 1 and 2” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “4” for the small role / replay indicates “Right / Right / Medium RT2 Transition Lip” as the internal winning combination and the winning is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lips 1 to 8”, “RT2 transition lips 1 and 2”, and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated.

  In the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “5” for small roles / replay indicates “middle left / right RT2 transition lip” as an internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 transition lip 4 to 6” and “RT2 transition lip 1 and 2” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “6” for the small role / replay indicates “middle right left RT2 transition lip” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 4-6”, “RT2 transition lip 1, 2” and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated.

  In the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “7” for small role / replay indicates “RT2 transition lip” as an internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 4-6”, “RT2 transition lip 1, 2” and “BAR follow lip 2” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “8” for the small role / replay indicates “right middle left RT2 transition lip” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 4-6”, “RT2 transition lip 1, 2” and “BAR follow lip 3” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “9” for the small role / replay indicates “left middle right RT2 maintenance lip” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As combinations of symbols (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1 to 8” and “RT1 transition lip 1 to 3, 7 to 12” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “10” for small roles / replay indicates “left / right middle RT2 maintenance lip” as an internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 1-3, 7-12” and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “11” for small roles / replay indicates “middle left / right RT2 maintenance lip” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1 to 8” and “RT1 transition lip 1 to 3, 7 to 16” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “12” for the small role / replay indicates “middle right left RT2 maintenance lip” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 1-3, 7-16” and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “13” for the small role / replay indicates “right / left middle RT2 maintenance lip” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As the combination (winning operation flag), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 1-3, 7-16” and “BAR follow lip 2” are associated.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “14” indicates “right middle left RT2 maintenance lip” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 1-3, 7-16” and “BAR follow lip 3” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  In the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “15” for small roles / replay indicates “left middle right RT3 transition lip” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “Normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 1-6” and “RT3 transition lip 1, 2” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “16” for small roles / replay indicates “left / right / medium RT3 transition lip” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 1-6”, “RT3 transition lip 1, 2” and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated.

  In the internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay, the data pointer “17” for small role / replay indicates “middle left / right RT3 transition lip” as an internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. “RT1 transition lip 1-3, 7-16” and “RT3 transition lip 1, 2” are associated with each other as a combination (winning operation flag).

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “18” for the small role / replay indicates “middle right left RT3 transition lip” as the internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. “RT1 transition lip 1 to 3, 7 to 16”, “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2”, and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated with each other.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “19” for the small role / replay indicates “right / left middle RT3 transition lip” as an internal winning combination, and the winning is permitted. "RT1 transition lip 1-12" and "RT3 transition lip 1, 2" are associated with each other as a combination (winning operation flag).

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay, the data pointer “20” for small role / replay indicates “right middle left RT3 transition lip” as an internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. “RT1 transition lip 1 to 12”, “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2”, and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated as symbol combinations (winning operation flags).

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “21” for the small role / replay indicates “left RT3 maintenance lip” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which winning is permitted is shown. As combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lips 1 to 8” and “RT1 transition lips 1 to 3” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “22” for the small role / replay indicates “medium RT3 maintenance lip” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol for which winning is permitted is shown. As combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 transition lip 1 to 3”, and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “23” for the small role / replay indicates “right RT3 maintenance lip” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of the winning is permitted. As combinations (winning operation flags), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT1 transition lip 1-3”, and “BAR follow lip 2” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay, the data pointer “24” for small role / replay indicates “BAR-matched fake rip” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT3 transition lip 1, 2” and “BAR follow lip 1-12” are associated.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “25” indicates “BAR uniform lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As (winning operation flag), “normal lip 1-8”, “RT3 transition lip 1, 2”, “BAR uniform lip” and “BAR follow lip 1-12” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “26” for small roles / replays indicates “left middle right bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “upper bells 1 to 4” and “left follow small roles 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay, the data pointer “27” for small role / replay indicates “left middle right bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As the combinations (winning operation flags), “upper bells 1 to 4” and “left follow small roles 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “28” for the small role / replay indicates “left / right / middle bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which the winning is permitted is shown. As combinations (winning operation flags), “upper bells 1 to 4” and “left follow small roles 3, 4, 7 to 10, 13, and 14” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “29” for the small role / replay indicates “Bell 2 left / right” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of the winning is permitted. As combinations (winning operation flags), “upper bells 1 to 4” and “left follow small roles 1, 2, 5, 6, 11, 12, 15, 16” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “30” for small roles / replay indicates “middle left / right bell 1” as an internal winning combination, and the symbol of winning is permitted. As combinations (winning operation flags), “cross-up bell”, “left follow small role 1,2,5,6,9,10,13,14”, “middle follow small role 1,2” and “right follow small size” “Compositions 2 and 4” are associated with each other.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “31” for the small role / replay indicates “middle left / right bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of the winning is permitted. As combinations (winning operation flags), “Cross-up bell”, “Left follow small part 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16” and “Medium follow small part 3, 4” are associated with each other. Yes.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “32” for the small role / replay indicates “middle right / left bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol for which winning is permitted is shown. As combinations (winning operation flags), “Cross-up bell”, “Left follow small roles 1, 2, 5, 6”, “Middle follow small roles 5, 6, 9, 10” and “Right follow small roles 2, 4” "Is associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “33” for the small role / replay indicates “middle right / left bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol for which winning is permitted is shown. As combinations (winning operation flags), “cross-up bell”, “left follow small combination 3, 4, 7, 8” and “medium follow small combination 7, 8, 10, 12” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “34” for the small role / replay indicates “Right / Left / Middle Bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which the winning is permitted is shown. As a combination (winning operation flag), “middle bell”, “left follow small roles 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14” and “right follow small roles 1, 2” are associated. .

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “35” for the small role / replay indicates “bell 2 on the right / left / right” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which the winning is permitted is shown. As a combination (winning operation flag), “middle bell”, “left follow small combination 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16” and “right follow small combination 3, 4” are associated. .

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “36” for the small role / replay indicates “right middle left bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol for which winning is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), “middle bell” and “left follow small role 1,2,5,6,9,10,13,14” are associated.

  Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “37” for the small role / replay indicates “right middle left bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), “middle bell” and “left follow small role 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay, the data pointer “38” for small role / replay indicates “unquestioned bell” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( “Cross-down bells 1 to 4” are associated with each other as a winning action flag.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “39” indicates “weak cherry” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols (the winning combination is permitted) ( As the winning operation flag), “weak cherries 1 to 3” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “40” for small roles / replay indicates “strong cherry” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win ( As “winning operation flags”, “strong cherries 1 to 10” and “weak cherries 1 to 3” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “41” indicates “middle cherry” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is permitted to win ( As “winning operation flags”, “middle cherries 1 and 2”, “strong cherries 1 to 10”, and “weak cherries 1 to 3” are associated.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “42” for the small role / replay indicates “watermelon” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols (winning) for which winning is permitted. As the operation flag), “watermelons 1 to 4” are associated.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small combination / replay data pointer “43” indicates “chance eye 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols permitted to win a prize. As the (winning operation flag), “special small role 1” is associated. Further, in the internal winning combination determination table for the small role / replay, the data pointer “44” for the small role / replay indicates “chance eye 2” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. “Special prize 2” is associated with (winning operation flag).

  Here, the “chance” is a combination of symbols of “losing” with no medal payout, but unlike a combination of symbols related to “losing”, a bonus combination may be won. It can be defined as a combination of special symbols that can give a sense of expectation. “Special small role 1” and “special small role 2” are both won in combination with a probability of 104/256 when determined as internal winning combinations in the general gaming state (see FIG. 16). Therefore, in this embodiment, when “special small role 1” or “special small role 2” is determined as an internal winning combination, and a “missing out” described later occurs, a special symbol combination is selected. It is supposed to be displayed on the display window 4. It should be noted that, even when “special hero 1” and “special hero 2” win, the same feeling of expectation that the bonus role has been won is the same, so “special hero 1” and “special hero 2” It can be said that the symbol combination itself is a “chance”.

  Also, in the internal winning combination determination table for small roles / replays, the data pointer “45” for small roles / replay indicates “all small roles” as internal winning roles, and the symbols related to all small roles are displayed. A winning combination (see FIG. 15) is permitted.

<Bonus internal winning combination decision table>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19, the bonus data pointer is associated with data for identifying a symbol combination (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted.

  Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19, for the sake of convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted for the bonus data pointer, and the name (contents) of the winning combination and the name of the internal winning combination ( Remarks) are associated.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “0” is associated with “losing”. Further, the bonus data pointer “1” indicates “PBB” as an internal winning combination, and “PBB” is associated with a symbol combination (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “2” indicates “BB1” as the internal winning combination, and “ BB1 ”is associated. Further, the bonus data pointer “3” indicates “BB2” as an internal winning combination, and “BB2” is associated with a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted. Further, the bonus data pointer “4” indicates “BB3” as an internal winning combination, and “BB3” is associated with a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted. Further, the bonus data pointer “5” indicates “BB4” as an internal winning combination, and “BB4” is associated with a symbol combination (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted. Further, the bonus data pointer “6” indicates “JAC” as an internal winning combination, and “BB in-between RB” is associated as a symbol combination (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted. Yes.

[Relationship between stop operation order for internal winning combination and winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the relationship between the stop operation sequence for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

  In FIG. 20, as the order of the stop operation, “left middle right” means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19L, the stop button 19C, and the stop button 19R, and “middle left and right” means the stop button 19L, The stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19R and the stop button 19C, and “middle left and right” means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19C, the stop button 19L, and the stop button 19R. “Right left” means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19C, the stop button 19R, and the stop button 19L, and “Right left middle” is performed in the order of the stop button 19R, the stop button 19L, and the stop button 19C. "Right middle left" means stop button 19R, stop button 19C, it means that the order stop operation of the stop buttons 19L is made.

<Outline of reel stop>
In the present embodiment, there may be a case where a plurality of symbol combinations permitted to win a prize are associated with one internal winning combination, and at what timing the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are operated. Depending on (stop operation timing) and in what order (stop operation order), the final winning combination to be displayed may be controlled to vary.

  That is, as to which symbol combination is finally displayed on the active line (in other words, as the basic information when the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop control), It is determined based on the following three elements.

  The first element is an internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, when the result of the internal lottery process is “losing” (the value of the data pointer for small role / replay is “0”), a combination of symbols related to any of the replay roles, or a combination of symbols related to the small role Will never be displayed on the active line.

  The second element is the player's stop operation timing (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined for four symbols, even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process, the winning is permitted accordingly. If the symbols constituting the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of four symbols, the combination of symbols permitted to win may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. This is called so-called “missing”. In FIG. 20, “or lost” means that there is this “missing”. Therefore, in the same figure, when “or lose” is not written, it means that at least one of the displayed winning combinations is displayed and there is no “missing”. .

  The third element is the stop operation order of the player. For example, when the result of the internal lottery process is “normal lip 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “1”), the stop operation timing is the same regardless of the stop operation order. Regardless, as shown in FIG. 20, a control is performed in which a combination of symbols related to any one of the “normal lips 1 to 8” is displayed on the active line.

  However, for example, when the result of the internal lottery process is “left middle right bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “26”), and the stop operation order is “left middle right” Is controlled so that any combination of symbols of “upper bells 1 to 4” is preferentially displayed on the active line regardless of the timing of the stop operation, while the stop operation order is other stop operations. In the case of the order, control is performed so that any combination of symbols “Left Follower 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14” is preferentially displayed on the active line. Is called. Then, when the stop operation timing is a timing at which a symbol constituting a combination of symbols of “Left Follower Role 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14” can be displayed on the effective line. As long as the combination of symbols “Left Follower 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14” is displayed on the active line, the stop operation timing is “Left Follower 1, 2, 5”. , 6, 9, 10, 13, 14 ", when it is not the timing at which the symbols constituting the symbol combination can be displayed on the effective line," RT1 "is a part of the symbol combination of" losing " The combination of any of the symbols “8 to 8” is to be displayed on the active line.

  Here, the internal winning combination “left middle right RT2 transition lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “3”) is set to the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is “left middle right”. Regardless, one of the “RT2 transition lips 1 and 2” wins, and transitions to the RT2 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state). Accordingly, when the internal winning combination is “left middle right RT2 transition lip” (the value of the data pointer for small role / replay is “3”), the stop operation sequence “left middle right” is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes the procedure of operation.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is “Right / Right / Medium RT2 Transition Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “4”), the stop operation sequence “Right / Medium” is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. If the internal winning combination is “middle left / right RT2 transition lip” (small pointer / replay data pointer value is “5”), the stop operation sequence “middle left / right” is the most advantageous stop for the player. If the internal winning combination is “middle right left RT2 transition lip” (small role / replay data pointer value is “6”), the stop operation sequence “middle right left” is the most advantageous for the player When the internal winning combination is “Right / Left / Right RT2 Transition Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “7”), the stop operation sequence “Right / Left / Middle” is the most advantageous for the player. The procedure of the stop operation When the internal winning combination is “Right middle left RT2 transition lip” (the value of the data pointer for small role / replay is “8”), the stop operation sequence “right middle left” is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. It becomes the procedure of.

  The internal winning combination “Left / Middle / Right RT2 Maintenance Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “9”) is related to the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is “Left / Middle / Right”. First, one of “normal lips 1 to 8” wins, and the RT2 gaming state, which is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state), is maintained. Accordingly, when the internal winning combination is “left middle right RT2 maintenance lip” (the small pointer / replay data pointer value is “9”), the stop operation sequence “left middle right” is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes the procedure of operation.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is “Right / Right / Medium RT2 Maintenance Lip” (the value of the small / replay data pointer is “10”), the stop operation sequence “Right / Medium” is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. If the internal winning combination is “Middle Left / Right RT2 Maintenance Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “11”), the stop operation sequence “Middle Left / Right” is the most advantageous stop for the player. If the internal winning combination is “Middle right / left RT2 maintenance lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “12”), the stop operation sequence “middle right / left” is the most advantageous for the player. If the internal winning combination is “Right / Left / Middle RT2 Maintenance Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “13”), the stop operation sequence “Right / Left / Middle” is the most advantageous for the player. Stop operation If the internal winning combination is “Right / Left / Right RT2 Maintenance Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “14”), the stop operation sequence “Right / Left / Right” is the most advantageous for the player. This is the procedure for the stop operation.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “left middle right RT3 transition lip” (the small role / replay data pointer value is “15”) is related to the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is “left middle right”. First, one of the “RT3 transition lips 1 and 2” wins and transitions to the RT3 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state). The RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which an ART game described later is performed. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “left middle right RT3 transition lip” (small pointer / replay data pointer value is “15”), the stop operation sequence “left middle right” is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes the procedure of operation.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is “Right / Right / Medium RT3 Transition Lip” (the small pointer / replay data pointer value is “16”), the stop operation sequence “Right / Medium” is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. If the internal winning combination is “Middle Left / Right RT3 Transition Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “17”), the stop operation sequence “Middle Left / Right” is the most advantageous stop for the player. If the internal winning combination is “middle right left RT3 transition lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “18”), the stop operation sequence “middle right left” is the most advantageous for the player If the internal winning combination is “Right / Left / Right RT3 Transition Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “19”), the stop operation sequence “Right / Left / Middle” is the most advantageous for the player. Stop operation When the internal winning combination is “Right / Middle / Left RT3 Transition Lip” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “20”), the stop operation sequence “Right / Middle / Left” is the most advantageous for the player. This is the procedure for the stop operation.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “left RT3 maintenance lip” (small pointer / replay data pointer value is “21”) has a stop operation order of “left middle right” or “left and right middle” (ie, “first left stop” Only in the case of “”), regardless of the stop operation timing, any of “normal lips 1 to 8” wins and the RT3 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) is maintained. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “left RT3 maintenance lip” (the value of the data pointer for small role / replay is “21”), the stop operation sequence “first stop left” is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. It becomes the procedure of.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is “main RT3 maintenance lip” (small role / replay data pointer value is “22”), the stop operation order is “middle left / right” or “middle right / left” (ie, “middle right / left”). “First stop”) is the procedure of the most advantageous stop operation for the player. When the internal winning combination is “Right RT3 maintenance lip” (the value of the data pointer for small role / replay is “23”), the stop operation The sequence “right middle left” or “right middle left” (that is, “first right stop”) is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination “left middle right bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “26”) and “left middle right bell 2” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “27”). Since they are common in that the same profit can be given when paying attention to the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), they can be collectively referred to as “left middle right bell”. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is “left middle right bell”, only when the stop operation order is “left middle right”, nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing. It is. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “left middle right bell”, the stop operation order “left middle right” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “left / right / middle bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “28”) and “left middle right bell 2” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “29”) When attention is paid to the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 20), it can be collectively referred to as “left and right middle bell” since it is common in that similar profit can be given. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is “left / right middle bell”, nine medals are paid out only when the stop operation order is “left / right middle” regardless of the stop operation timing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “left / right / middle bell”, the stop operation sequence “left / right / middle” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “middle left / right bell 1” (small role / replay data pointer value is “30”) and “middle right / left bell 2” (small role / replay data pointer value is “31”) When attention is paid to the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 20), it can be collectively referred to as “middle left and right bell” since it is common in that similar profits can be given. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle left and right bell”, nine medals are paid out only when the stop operation order is “middle left and right” regardless of the stop operation timing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “middle left / right bell”, the stop operation sequence “middle left / right” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination “middle right / left bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “32”) and “middle right left bell 2” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “33”) Focusing on the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 20) is common in that the same profit can be given, and thus can be collectively referred to as “middle right left bell”. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle right left bell”, only when the stop operation order is “middle right left”, nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “middle right / left bell”, the stop operation sequence “middle right / left” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination “Right / Left / Middle Bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “34”) and “Right / Left / Middle Bell 2” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “35”) When attention is paid to the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 20), it can be collectively referred to as “right / left / right bell” since it is common in that similar profits can be given. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is “middle right bell”, nine medals are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation only when the stop operation order is “middle right”. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “middle right / left bell”, the sequence of stop operations “middle right / left” is the most advantageous sequence of stop operations for the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination “right middle left bell 1” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “36”) and “right middle left bell 2” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “37”). Since they are common in that the same profit can be given when paying attention to the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 20), they can be collectively referred to as “right middle left bell”. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is “right middle left bell”, nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is “right middle left”. It is. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “right middle left bell”, the stop operation sequence “right middle left” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

  Thus, based on the third element described above, the internal winning combination in which the player's profit fluctuates is referred to as a so-called “push order replay”, and when it is a replay combination, it is referred to as “push order replay”. In the case of a small combination, it may be referred to as “push order small combination”.

  In the present embodiment, in the ART game, when “pushing forward” is determined as the internal winning combination, a stop operation sequence that is a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified.

<Reel stop control>
The main CPU 93 executes the following processing in order to realize the above-described reel stop control.

  First, when an internal winning combination is determined in an internal lottery process (see S14 in FIG. 63) described later and information relating to the internal winning combination is stored in the main RAM 95, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (see FIG. 63 (see S16 of 63), various stop control information stored in the main ROM 94 is read out and stored in the main RAM 95 based on the internal winning combination.

  Here, as examples of information stored as various types of stop control information, in relation to the above-described second element, at which symbol position at which symbol position is operated at each symbol position in each reel, the symbol is stopped ( In relation to information that directly or indirectly defines the number of sliding pieces) and the third element described above, which symbol combination is preferentially displayed when the stop button is operated in any stop operation order For example, information that directly or indirectly defines the above.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stops each reel based on various kinds of stop control information stored in the main RAM 95 in a reel stop control process (see S22 in FIG. 63) described later. In particular, when the internal winning combination is “push order”, appropriate stop control information is selected from the stored stop control information according to the stop operation order, or one stop operation is performed. After that, stop control information is generated (changed) to perform stop control.

  Depending on the stop operation timing and stop operation order, different stop controls may be executed even for the same internal winning combination. However, the stop control is uniquely determined in advance and the same As long as it is an internal winning combination and the same stop operation timing and stop operation sequence, the same stop control is executed.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, the configuration of various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 21 is composed of 16 storage areas of internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 16. The internal winning combination storage area is configured to be able to store data (bits) corresponding to combinations of symbols defined in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, and as a result of the internal lottery process, a prize is awarded. “1” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the permitted symbol combination, and “0” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the symbol combination that is not permitted to win. Note that “RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8” are not strictly an internal winning combination, but are a combination of symbols that are displayed by missing a winning combination, so that they may not be stored in the internal winning combination storage area. Good. In this case, the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 15 may be configured by 15 storage areas.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 22 includes 16 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 16. The display combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area described above, and as a result of the internal lottery process, among the combinations of symbols permitted to win, symbols that can be displayed on the active line “1” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the combination, and “0” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. The display combination storage area is updated based on data (bits) stored in a symbol code storage area (to be described later) each time the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. Even after all of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, a combination of symbols in which “1” is set becomes a winning combination. That is, the display combination storing area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the winning combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 23 is configured by 16 storage areas of symbol code storage areas 1 to 16. The symbol code storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area and display combination storage area described above, and is valid among the combinations of symbols defined in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. “1” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the line, and “0” is set in the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. Set. The symbol code storage area is updated with data (bits) each time the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

<Carry-over portion storage area>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 stores data related to the carryover combination. For example, when a bonus combination (including RB in BB) is won internally, bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area corresponding to the bonus combination won internally is set to “1”, and the bonus combination is won and the BB gaming state The corresponding bit is reset to “0” when transitioning to (BB RB gaming state in case of RB during BB).

<Game state flag storage area>
In the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 25, data relating to each gaming state of the BB gaming state and the RT gaming state is stored. For example, when the PBB gaming state is entered, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  Also, for example, when the RT gaming state becomes the RT1 gaming state, bit 4 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1”. When all the bits 0 to 7 of the gaming state flag storage area are “0”, the gaming state becomes the RT0 gaming state.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 26 stores the operation states of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R. Bit 0 corresponds to the stop button 19L, and “1” is stored in bit 0 when the stop button 19L is operated.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the stop button 19C, and “1” is stored in bit 1 when the stop button 19C is operated. Bit 2 corresponds to the stop button 19R, and “1” is stored in bit 2 when the stop button 19R is operated.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the stop button 19L, and “1” is stored in bit 4 when the stop button 19L is valid. Bit 5 corresponds to the stop button 19C, and “1” is stored in bit 5 when the stop button 19C is valid. Bit 6 corresponds to the stop button 19R. When the stop button 19R is valid, “1” is stored in bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, effective stop buttons refer to stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R that correspond to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and can detect a stop operation by the main CPU 93.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 27 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order (ie, pressing order) of the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R. Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”, and other bits are set to “0”. Reset.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the pressing order “left → right → middle”, bit 2 corresponds to the pressing order “middle → left → right”, and bit 3 corresponds to the pressing order “middle → right → left”. Bit 4 corresponds to the pressing order “right → left → middle”, and bit 5 corresponds to the pressing order “right → middle → left”.

[Composition of various lottery tables used for production]
Next, the configuration of various lottery tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<PBB on top ART game number lottery table>
The PBB medium ART game lottery table shown in FIG. 28 is referred to in the start command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 80, and is added in the PBB gaming state (“PBB” in FIG. 62). Used to determine the number.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the PBB added ART game number lottery table, lottery values are assigned so that the added ART game number of any of the added ART games number 5 to 300 games is determined based on the internal winning combination. It has been. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and lottery allocated in FIG. 28 shows an example, and is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set value.

  That is, in the PBB gaming state, the number of added ART games is determined for each unit game based on the determined type of the internal winning combination, and the number of ART games in the ART game that is shifted to after the end of the PBB gaming state is added.

<Character lottery table during battle CZ>
The character lottery table during battle CZ shown in FIG. 29 is referred to in a process for receiving a winning action command, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 88, and battles enemy characters when a battle effect is executed during “battle CZ”. Used to determine the type of ally character. Here, “CZ” is an abbreviation of “chance zone”, and means that the degree of expectation for shifting to an ART game, which is an advantageous state for the player, is high. The flow of the game related to “Battle CZ” will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the character lottery table during battle CZ, lottery values are assigned so that any one of the teammate character A, teammate character B, or teammate character C is determined based on the set value. Yes. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 29 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, a different lottery value may be assigned for each set value.

  In the character lottery table for battle CZ shown in FIG. 29, for example, in the case of setting values 1 to 5, the teammate character C is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, whereas in the case of setting value 6, 6554. The friend character C is determined with a probability of / 32768. Therefore, when the number of times the teammate character C is determined is large, it can be recognized that the possibility of the set value 6 is high. The set value is a value indicating that the higher the value, the higher the degree of advantage for the player (the higher the payout rate). In the present embodiment, for example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a bonus combination will be determined as an internal winning combination, or the higher the set value, the higher the probability of shifting to an ART game. It is assumed that

<HP subtraction success / failure lottery table>
The HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 30 is referred to in the battle CZ mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 84. In “Battle CZ”, the character type (any one of the teammate characters A to C) and the internal winning combination Based on the above, it is used to determine whether or not to perform an effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character. Here, “HP” is an abbreviation for “hit point”. As the teammate character performs an attack on the enemy character, the enemy character “HP” is subtracted, and when the enemy character “HP” is equal to or less than “0”, the game shifts to an ART game. It becomes. That is, in FIG. 30 and FIGS. 31 to 37 to be described later, “HP” is a specific numerical value for determining whether or not to give a privilege of shifting to an ART game that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table is determined based on the internal winning combination for each character type (any one of the characters A to C), or “HP” is not subtracted, or A lottery value is assigned so that one of winning (ie, “HP” is subtracted) is determined. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and lottery allocated in FIG. 30 shows an example, and is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set value.

<HP subtraction value lottery table>
The character A HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 31, the character B HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 32, and the character C HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 33 are the battle CZ described later in the description of FIG. It is referred to in the middle process, and in “Battle CZ”, an effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character based on the character type (any one of the characters A to C) and the internal winning combination may be performed. When it is determined, it is used to determine a subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from “HP”.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the HP subtraction value lottery table is based on the internal winning combination for each character type (any one of the teammate characters A to C). A lottery value is assigned so that the value is determined. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and the lottery assigned in FIGS. 31 to 33 shows an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, the lottery values assigned to one or a plurality of specific combinations (for example, “weak cherry” or “watermelon”) may be different for each character type (any one of the teammate characters A to C).

<Lip consecutive HP subtraction success / failure lottery table>
34 is referred to in the battle CZ mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 84, and in “Battle CZ”, the character type (any one of the teammate characters A to C), Based on the number of consecutive replays, it is used to determine whether or not to perform an effect in which an ally character attacks an enemy character. Here, the “rep series” is synonymous with the number of consecutive replays, and indicates the number of times that a replay role is continuously determined as an internal winning combination. Since the replay combination is a winning combination that wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the player, the “rep series” and the number of consecutive replays may be the number of times that the replay combination has continuously won.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the rep consecutive HP subtraction success / failure lottery table is not subtracted (that is, “HP” is not subtracted for each character type (any one of the teammate characters A to C) based on the number of consecutive replays). ) Or winning (ie, “HP” is subtracted) is assigned a lottery value. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 34 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set value.

<Lip consecutive HP subtraction value lottery table>
The HP consecutive character A HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 35, the Lip consecutive character B HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 36, and the Lip consecutive character C HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. In the description of FIG. 84, it is referred to in the battle CZ mid-process described later. In “Battle CZ”, an ally character becomes an enemy character based on the character type (any one of the characters A to C) and the number of consecutive replays. When it is determined to perform an attacking attack, it is used to determine a subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from “HP” accordingly.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the Lip consecutive HP subtraction value lottery table is one of HP subtraction values 5 to 60P based on the number of consecutive replays for each character type (any one of the teammate characters A to C). A lottery value is assigned so that the HP subtraction value is determined. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and lottery allocated in FIGS. 35-37 shows an example, and is not restricted to this. For example, the lottery value assigned in a specific number of consecutive replays (for example, “others”) may be made different for each character type (any one of the teammate characters A to C).

<In the battle CZ during ART winning, add the number of ART games, success or failure lottery table>
The ART game number addition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 38 in the ART C during the battle CZ is referred to in the battle CZ mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 84, and it is determined to shift to the ART game during the “battle CZ”. Is used to determine whether or not to increase the number of ART games based on the number of draws that can be drawn and the internal winning combination when “HP” becomes “0” or less. Here, the “number of lotterable times” indicates a lottery period during which a lottery for shifting to an ART game (ie, a subtraction lottery of “HP”) is performed during “Battle CZ”.

  The number of times that the lottery can be performed is in the push order small role (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “26” to “37”) or the RB medium / small size role (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “45”). When it is determined as a winning combination, “1” is added, and when the number of possible lotteries becomes “5” or more, during the subsequent “Battle CZ”, a lottery (ie, “HP” Subtract lottery) is not performed. In other words, in this embodiment, when the process shifts to “Battle CZ”, then the push order small combination (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “26” to “37”) or the RB medium small combination (small combination / A lottery for shifting to the ART game (that is, a subtraction lottery of “HP”) with a period until the value of the data pointer for replay “45”) is accumulated and determined as an internal winning combination 5 times is a lottery period Is configured to be performed.

  Further, the push order small combination (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “26” to “37”) is a bell (that is, regardless of the stop operation timing of the player) when the stop operation order is correct. , Upper bell 1 to 4, cross-up bell, or middle bell), and RB medium / small role (value of data pointer for small role / replay is “45”) is a player's stop operation The bell (that is, any of the cross-down bells 1 to 4, the upper bells 1 to 4, the cross-up bell, or the middle bell) wins regardless of the timing. Therefore, the number of possible lotteries can be said to be the number of winnings for a specific combination (bell) in the BB gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the ART game number extra success / failure lottery table in the battle CZ during ART winning is determined based on the internal winning combination for each possible lottery, ie, the number of ART games is not added, or won. A lottery value is assigned so that one of them (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and lottery allocated in FIG. 38 shows an example, and is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of games in “Battle CZ”. Specifically, when the number of lotterable times is “4” and the number of games is less than “10”, the lottery is performed according to the lottery value as shown in FIG. 38, and the number of games is “10”. If it is above, it is good also as assigning a lottery value so that winning (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined with higher probability than shown in FIG.

<Additional ART game number lottery table during battle CZ ART selection>
FIG. 39 shows the ART game number lottery table added during the ART C during the battle CZ, which is referred to in the battle CZ process to be described later in the description of FIG. 84, and it is decided to shift to the ART game during the “battle CZ”. In the case (that is, when “HP” becomes “0” or less) and it is determined that the number of ART games is to be added, the number of additional ART games (multiple) based on the number of draws that can be drawn Used to determine

  As shown in FIG. 39, the ART game number lottery table for the ART C during the battle CZ is based on the number of drawable times, and the number of ART games added (multiple) is 2 to 5 times. A lottery value is assigned so that is determined. The added ART game number (multiple) is used to determine how many times the initial value “50” of the ART game number is to be increased. For example, when “double” is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiple), the initial value of the number of ART games is “100 (50 × 2)”, and the number of additional ART games (multiple) is “three times” ”Is determined, the initial value of the number of ART games is“ 150 (50 × 3) ”, and when“ 4 times ”is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiple), the number of ART games is When the initial value is “200 (50 × 4)” and “5 times” is determined as the additional ART game number (multiple), the initial value of the ART game number is “250 (50 × 5)”. . However, the lottery values assigned in FIG. 39 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, the number of ART games to be added directly may be determined based on the number of lotterable times in the same way as in the battle CZ addition ART game number lottery table described later in the description of FIG.

<Success / Lot lottery table for the number of ART games in Battle CZ>
40 is referred to in the battle CZ mid-process to be described later in the description of FIG. 84, and it is determined to shift to the ART game during the “battle CZ” (that is, FIG. 40). After “HP” becomes “0” or less), it is used to determine whether or not to increase the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination until “Battle CZ” ends.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the battle CZ ART game number addition success / failure lottery table, based on the internal winning combination, it is not won (that is, the ART game number is not added) or won (that is, the ART game number is added). A lottery value is assigned so that one of the above is determined. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and lottery allocated in FIG. 40 shows an example, and is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of games in “Battle CZ”. Specifically, if the number of games is less than “20”, the lottery is performed according to the lottery value as shown in FIG. 40. If the number of games is “20” or more, it is higher than that shown in FIG. The lottery value may be assigned so that the winning (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined with probability.

<Bart CZ addition ART game number lottery table>
41 is referred to in the battle CZ mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 84, and when it is decided to shift to the ART game during “battle CZ” (that is, FIG. 41). , When “HP” becomes “0” or less) and the number of ART games is determined to be added, it is used to determine the number of additional ART games based on the internal winning combination. It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the lottery value of the added ART game number lottery table in the battle CZ is determined so that the added ART game number of any of the added ART game numbers 5 to 300 games is determined based on the internal winning combination. Assigned. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and lottery allocated in FIG. 41 shows an example, and is not limited to this. For example, the number of additional ART games (multiplier) may be determined based on the internal winning combination in the same manner as in the extra ART game number lottery table during the ART C during the battle CZ shown in FIG.

<Card acquisition success / failure lottery table>
The card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 42 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used in “item CZ” described later based on the internal winning combination in “normal BB”. Used to determine whether or not to acquire an item. Here, in the present embodiment, a “card” is used as an example of an item. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes all modes that allow a player to recognize a plurality of items. For example, it may indicate an ornament (equipment) of an ally character, or may indicate a jewel. In “Item CZ”, which will be described later, a lottery of whether or not to shift to the ART game is performed over the number of games corresponding to the number of items acquired in “Normal BB”. Will be migrated. That is, in FIG. 42 and FIGS. 42 to 49 described later, the “card” is a lottery right for a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to an ART game that is advantageous to the player. The flow of the game related to “normal BB” will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the card acquisition success / failure lottery table, based on the internal winning combination, either the non-winning (that is, the “card” is not acquired) or the winning (that is, the “card” is acquired) is selected. A lottery value is assigned as determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 42 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set value.

<Card type lottery table>
The card type lottery table shown in FIG. 43 is referred to in the normal BB mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used to determine the card type based on the internal winning combination in “normal BB”. In this embodiment, seven types of “LV1 card” to “LV7 card” are provided as card types. When the card type is acquired, the display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and “to be described later” are described. The item CZ is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning the lottery for whether or not to shift to the ART game is different. That is, “LV (level)” indicates an expectation level regarding whether or not to shift to an ART game that is advantageous to the player.

  The “LV1 card” has the lowest degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the ART game. When the “LV1 card” is acquired, for example, a card with one star is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 accordingly. . When the “LV7 card” has the highest degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the ART game, and is acquired, for example, a card on which seven stars are described is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. That is, the higher the “LV (level)”, the higher the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the ART game, and the display corresponding to the degree of expectation will be made.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the card type lottery table, lottery values are assigned so that any one of “LV1 card” to “LV7 card” is determined based on the internal winning combination. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 43 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, it is good also as making the lottery value allocated differ based on the frequency | count of a lottery.

<Lip consecutive card acquisition success / failure lottery table>
The rep consecutive card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 44 is referred to in the normal BB mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 85, and in “normal BB”, the “item CZ” described later is based on the number of consecutive replays. Used to determine whether or not to acquire an item used for Note that the “rep series” and the number of consecutive replays are the same as those in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the rep consecutive card acquisition success / failure lottery table is based on the number of consecutive replays and is either non-winning (that is, “card” is not acquired) or winning (that is, “card” is acquired). A lottery value is assigned so that either one is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 44 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set value.

<Lip consecutive card type lottery table>
The rep consecutive card type lottery table shown in FIG. 45 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used to determine the card type based on the number of consecutive replays in “normal BB”. It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in the Lip consecutive card type lottery table, lottery values are assigned so that any one of “LV1 card” to “LV7 card” is determined based on the number of consecutive replays. . Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 45 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, it is good also as making the lottery value allocated differ based on the frequency | count of a lottery.

<Normal BB ART game number addition success / failure lottery table>
The normal BB ART game number addition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 46 is referred to in the normal BB processing to be described later in the description of FIG. 85, and it is determined to shift to the ART game during “normal BB” (that is, In order to determine whether or not to increase the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination until “normal BB” is ended after “card number” becomes “8” or more as will be described later) Used for.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the normal BB ART game number addition success / failure lottery table is based on the internal winning combination, which is not won (that is, the ART game number is not added) or won (that is, the ART game number is added). A lottery value is assigned so that one of the above is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 46 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of games in “Normal BB”. Specifically, if the number of games is less than “20”, the lottery is performed according to the lottery value as shown in FIG. 46, and if the number of games is “20” or more, it is higher than that shown in FIG. The lottery value may be assigned so that the winning (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined with probability.

<Normal BB on top ART game number lottery table>
The normal BB added ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 47 is referred to in the normal BB mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 85, and when it is decided to shift to the ART game during “normal BB” (that is, If the number of cards is “8” or more as will be described later) and the number of ART games is determined to be added, the number of added ART games based on the internal winning combination Used to determine

  As shown in FIG. 47, the lottery value of the added ART game number lottery table in the normal BB is determined so that the added ART game number of any of the added ART game numbers 5 to 300 games is determined based on the internal winning combination. Assigned. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 47 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, the number of additional ART games (multiplier) may be determined based on the internal winning combination in the same manner as in the extra ART game number lottery table during the ART C during the battle CZ shown in FIG.

<Art game lottery table with extra cards>
The extra card game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and when it is determined to shift to the ART game during “normal BB” (that is, When the “card number” becomes “8” or more as will be described later), the card that is not used in the “item CZ” to be described later (that is, in this case, “8” or more surplus cards). This is used to determine the number of ART games to be added by performing lottery for the number of remaining cards based on the card type.

  In addition, the extra card game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to in the item CZ processing to be described later in the description of FIG. 86, and when it is decided to shift to the ART game in “item CZ”. (In other words, as described later, in the case of winning the ART lottery executed based on the card type and the internal winning combination), in the card that is not used in the “item CZ” (for example, “in the normal BB”, If you have acquired 5 cards and you win the ART lottery based on the first card in “Item CZ”, the remaining card is based on the card type of “4” remaining cards) Is used to determine the number of ART games to be added.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the extra card game number lottery table assigns a lottery value so that the additional ART game number of any of the additional ART game numbers 5 to 300 is determined based on the card type. It has been. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the extra card extra game game lottery table is selected so that the higher the extra card expectation level ("LV (level)"), the larger the extra game number to be determined. A value has been assigned. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 48 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the internal winning combination, the number of games, the number of possible lotteries, etc. in the unit game in which the surplus card is generated.

<ART CZ ART lottery table>
The ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. 49 is referred to in the item CZ processing described later in the description of FIG. 86, and in “item CZ”, based on the card type of the card acquired in “normal BB”. Used to determine whether or not to shift to an ART game. As described above, this item CZ ART lottery table is configured such that the higher the “LV (level)” of a card, the higher the probability of shifting to an ART game. The flow of the game related to “item CZ” will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the ART lottery table in the item CZ is determined based on the internal winning combination for each card type (any one of the LV1 to LV7 cards), or won. A lottery value is assigned so that any one of them (that is, shift to ART game) is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 49 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of item CZ games (that is, the number of cards) described later.

  Further, the ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. 49 has “weak cherry” (corresponding to the winning number “77” in the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 16), “strong cherry” as the type of internal winning combination. "(Corresponding to the winning number" 78 "in the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 16)," Watermelon "(corresponding to the winning number" 80 "in the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 16), "1" and "Chance 2" (corresponding to winning numbers "81" and "82" in the general game state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16), "BAR matching lip", and "Bonus duplicate combination" (see FIG. 16) The winning numbers “63” and “2”, “4” to “11”, “13” to “20”, “22” to “29”, “31” to “31” in the internal game state internal lottery table shown. Corresponds to 8 "), and" other "(more winning numbers and the gaming mode internal lottery table for that shown in Figure 16 corresponds to the" loss ") is defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the winning probability of the replay role in the BB gaming state is configured to be taken over by the general gaming state after the BB gaming state ends. That is, the “item CZ” is an RT0 gaming state (and an RT1 gaming state transitioned from the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state) which is a replay low probability state (low RT gaming state), or a replay high probability state (high It may be executed in both the RT2 gaming state (RT gaming state). However, if “JAC” is won internally during “Normal BB”, the fact is notified, so if the player performs a stop operation at a stop operation timing that does not win “JAC”, basically, “Item CZ” is executed in the RT2 gaming state. However, when the player performs a stop operation at the stop operation timing for winning the “JAC”, the “item CZ” is executed in the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state.

  In addition, in the “item CZ” executed in the RT2 gaming state that is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state), the stop operation for preventing the transition to the RT1 gaming state that is the replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) Therefore, the RT2 gaming state is basically maintained during the “item CZ” if the player performs the stop operation according to the notified stop operation procedure. However, if the stop operation is not performed in accordance with the stop operation procedure notified by the player, the RT2 gaming state may be shifted to the RT1 gaming state during the “item CZ”.

  Therefore, in the ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. 49, an internal winning combination (for example, “RT2 maintenance lip”) determined with high probability in the RT2 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state), An RT0 gaming state that is a low probability state of replay (low RT gaming state) or an internal winning combination (for example, “losing”) determined with a high probability in the RT1 gaming state is defined as the same internal winning combination type, and ART The probability of shifting to a game is defined to be the lowest compared to other types of internal winning combinations.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined lottery state (for example, during “item CZ”) in which a lottery for whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, an ART game) advantageous to the player is performed is a replay. There may be a transition in any gaming state of a high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state) and a replay low probability state (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state), but a common lottery table in any gaming state It is possible to perform a lottery using (for example, the ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. 49).

  By configuring in this way, the number of lottery tables used in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a game state (for example, ART game) advantageous to the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent the storage area (for example, the storage area of the ROM cartridge substrate 86) from being compressed. In addition, even if the player intentionally shifts from the replay high probability state to the replay low probability state, it is not possible to receive an advantageous lottery. , Whether or not to shift to ART games) can be appropriately drawn.

<ART subtracting success / failure lottery table during ART>
The ART HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 50 is referred to in the extra BB mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 82, and in the “extra BB”, the enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D), the internal Based on the winning combination, it is used to determine whether or not to perform an effect in which the teammate character attacks the enemy character. As the teammate character performs an attack on the enemy character, the enemy character “HP” is subtracted, and when the enemy character “HP” is equal to or less than “0”, the number of ART games is increased. Will shift to a special extra state. That is, in FIG. 50 and FIGS. 51 to 54 to be described later, “HP” is a specific added state (special added state) for adding the number of ART games (ART game number) that is advantageous to the player. It is a specific numerical value for deciding whether or not to grant the privilege of shifting to.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during ART is not won (that is, “HP” is not subtracted) for each enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D) based on the internal winning combination. Or a lottery value is assigned so that either a winning (ie, “HP” is subtracted) is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 50 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set value.

<HP subtraction value lottery table during ART>
The in-art HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 51 is referred to in the additional BB processing to be described later in the description of FIG. 82, and in “added BB”, the enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D), the internal In order to determine a subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from “HP” when it is determined that the teammate character will perform an attack attacking the enemy character based on the winning combination. Used.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the HP subtraction value lottery table during ART, lottery values are assigned so that any one of the HP subtraction values 5 to 60P is determined based on the internal winning combination. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 51 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned at least in part for each enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D).

<Lip consecutive HP subtraction success / failure lottery table>
The HP consecutive subtraction success / failure lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 52 is referred to in the process of adding BB, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 82, and in “adding BB”, the enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D). And based on the number of consecutive replays, it is used to determine whether or not to perform an effect in which the teammate character attacks the enemy character. Note that the “rep series” and the number of consecutive replays are the same as those in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the Lip consecutive HP subtraction success / failure lottery table is determined based on the number of consecutive replays for each enemy type (one of the enemy characters A to C or enemy character D) (ie, “ A lottery value is assigned so that either “HP” is not subtracted) or winning (ie, “HP” is subtracted) is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 52 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set value.

<Lip consecutive HP subtraction value lottery table>
The lip consecutive enemy A to C ART subtraction HP lottery value lottery table shown in FIG. 53 and the lip consecutive enemy D ART HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 54 are in the extra BB described later in the description of FIG. It is referred to in the processing, and it is determined that the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character is determined based on the enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D) and the number of continuous replays in the “add-on BB”. In this case, it is used to determine a subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from “HP”.

  As shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the HP subtraction value lottery table during REP continuous ART is based on the number of consecutive replays for each enemy type (enemy characters A to C or enemy character D). The lottery value is assigned so that any one of the subtraction values 5 to 60P is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIGS. 53 and 54 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, the lottery value assigned in a specific number of consecutive replays (for example, “others”) may be different for each enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to C).

<Bart winning lottery table for the number of ART games added>
55. The ART game number extra lottery bell winning number lottery table shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the item CZ mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 86, and the “item CZ” is determined to shift to the ART game. It is used for determining the “bell winning number” for adding the number of ART games to the lottery (that is, when the ART transfer lottery based on the card type and the internal winning combination is won). Here, the “bell winning number” indicates the number of winnings of a bell (that is, one of the cross-down bells 1 to 4, the upper bell 1 to 4, the cross-up bell, or the middle bell) in the ART game. In FIGS. 55 to 57, the number of wins for the bell (that is, any of the cross-down bells 1 to 4, the upper bells 1 to 4, the cross-up bell, or the middle bell) is used instead of the “bell winning number”. The “bell winning number” shown may be used.

  55 is referred to in the normal game process to be described later in the description of FIG. 87, and it is determined to shift to the ART game during the “normal game”. In the case (for example, when the winning combination “BAR match lip” is won), it is used to determine the number of bell winning prizes for the lottery by adding the number of ART games.

  55 is referred to in a process for receiving a winning action command, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 88, and the number of winning a bell in the “ART game” is determined. It is used to determine the number of Bell winning again when the number of Bell winning is reached.

  55 is referred to in the bonus end command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 89, and when the PBB gaming state is ended, the “battle CZ” is ended. If it is decided to go to ART at the time, and if it is decided to go to ART at the end of "Normal BB", the number of Bell prizes for the lottery by adding the number of ART games is decided Used to do.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a lottery value is assigned to the bell winning number lottery table for the lottery for adding the number of ART games so that one of the bell winning numbers 1 to 20 is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 55 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, a different lottery value may be assigned for each transition opportunity determined to shift to ART.

<The number of ART games added when the number of times a bell is won is added / No success lottery table>
The ART game number extra success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 56 when the number of bell winnings is reached is referred to in the process of receiving a winning action command, which will be described later in the description of FIG. This is used to determine whether or not to increase the number of ART games when the number of Bell winnings is reached.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the number of successful ART games at the time of reaching the number of Bell prizes is either non-winning (that is, the number of ART games is not added) or winning (that is, the number of ART games is added). A lottery value is assigned so that is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 56 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of games in the “ART game”. Further, for example, as described above, a different lottery value may be assigned for each transition opportunity determined to shift to ART.

<Bart drawing lottery table added when the number of times the Bell is won>
The added ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 57 when the number of times of winning the bell is reached is referred to in the process of receiving a winning action command to be described later in the description of FIG. 88, and the number of times of winning the bell in the “ART game” is determined. This is used to determine the number of additional ART games when it is determined that the number of ART games will be added when it reaches the number of times that the bell is won.

  As shown in FIG. 57, a lottery value is assigned to the added ART game number lottery table when the number of Bell winnings is reached, so that the added ART game number of any of the additional ART games numbered 5 to 300 is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 57 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, it is good also as determining the addition ART game number (multiple) which determines how many times of the ART game number of times determined the number of Bell winnings is added. In this case, when “1 time” is determined as the number of Bell prizes and “5 times” is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiplier), the number of ART games for five games is added. If “20 times” is determined as the number of times and “5 times” is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiple), the number of ART games for 100 games will be added, so there will be more Bell prizes. Even if the number of times is determined, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation.

<During lottery table for mode transition during ART>
The ART mode mode lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to in the ART game processing described later in the description of FIG. 81, and during the ART game, the mode (the normal mode or the preferential treatment) based on the internal winning combination. Mode). Note that the “preferential mode” is a specific mode that has a higher probability of continuing (or winning) the extra lottery in the number of ART games in the special extra state than the “normal mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the mode transition lottery table during ART is switched to the mode (the normal mode or the preferential mode) for the current mode (either the normal mode or the preferential mode) based on the internal winning combination. A lottery value is assigned so that any one of them is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 58 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, as in the normal middle mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59, there is an internal winning combination other than the bell (that is, any of the cross-down bells 1 to 4, the upper bells 1 to 4, the cross-up bell, or the middle bell). The mode transition lottery may also be performed when determined.

<Normal mode transition lottery table>
The normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59 is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 87, and during the normal game, the mode (normal mode or battle) in the normal game is based on the internal winning combination. Mode). The “battle mode” is a specific mode for shifting the BB gaming state to “battle CZ” when BB1 to 4 are internally won during normal gaming.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the normal mode transition lottery table is based on the internal winning combination for each current mode (either the normal mode or the battle mode). A lottery value is assigned so that any one of them is determined. Note that the lottery values assigned in FIG. 59 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the current number of ceiling games.

<Art mode mode lottery table>
The ART end mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is referred to in the ART game end check process described later in the description of FIG. 83, and the first mode in the normal game (normal mode or battle mode) at the end of the ART game. Used to determine

  As shown in FIG. 60, the lottery value is assigned to the ART end-time mode transition lottery table so that the transition destination mode (either the normal mode or the battle mode) is determined. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and lottery allocated in FIG. 60 shows an example, and is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set value.

<Number game for the number of precursors at the time of BB winning>
The BB winning sign game number lottery table shown in FIG. 61 is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 87, and the internal lottery result is notified when BB1 to BB4 are internally won during the normal game. Used to determine the number of precursor games before being played. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, a continuous production | presentation is performed so that a player's feeling of expectation may be continued after BB1-4 wins an internal winning until it announces the internal lottery result. That is, it can be said that the “number of precursor games” indicates the number of games in which a continuous effect is executed. Therefore, even if BB1 to 4 are not internal winning, a specific internal winning combination (for example, normal lip 1, unquestioned bell, weak cherry, strong, which is determined as an internal winning combination overlapping with BB1 to 4) Cherry, Chance 1st, Chance 2nd, Middle Cherry, or Watermelon) is determined as an internal winner, the number of precursor games is determined, and continuous performance is performed according to the determined number of precursor games It may be executed. In this case, in the final game of the continuous production, BB1 to 4 are notified that they have not been won internally.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the BB winning sign game number lottery table, lottery values are assigned so that the number of predictor games from 0 to 5 games is determined based on the internal winning combination. Yes. Here, when the number of precursor games is “0 game”, the continuous production is not executed, and the internal lottery result is notified in the game in which BB1 to 4 are won internally. In addition, each element used for the lottery value and lottery allocated in FIG. 60 shows an example, and is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the current number of ceiling games. Specifically, when the number of ceiling games is “496” and the BBs 1 to 4 are internally won, the number of predictive games whose ceiling game number is “500” or more (for example, 4 games or 5 games) It is good also as assigning a lottery value so that it is determined with a higher probability than shown in FIG. That is, when the number of ceiling games reaches the specified number of games (for example, “500”), when the bonus combination is won internally, it is easy to determine the number of predictive games whose number of ceiling games exceeds the specified number of games. It is good as well. By configuring in this way, even if the bonus function is won internally just before the ceiling function is activated (in this embodiment, “Battle CZ” is determined), the player can receive the profit from the ceiling function. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player's game.

[Pachislot machine game flow]
Next, the game flow of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing a game flow in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  First, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game is played by the player, which is an ART game that is an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, and a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous than the ART game. It is roughly divided into normal games.

<Normal game>
Transition from normal game to ART game is that “PBB” is won / winned, PBB game state is completed, condition for transition to ART game in “Battle CZ” is satisfied (CZ success), “Item It will be triggered by the fact that the conditions for transitioning to ART games are satisfied during "CZ" (CZ success) and that "BAR matching lip" is won. Further, although not shown in FIG. 62, the game is shifted to the ART game even when the conditions for shifting to the ART game are satisfied during the “normal BB”. In addition, as described above, “PBB” and “BAR matching lip” are determinants for confirming the transition to the ART game.

<PBB>
In the normal game, when the bonus combination “PBB” is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition to the ART game is confirmed, the initial value (50) of the number of ART games is given, and the number of ART sets is drawn. Is done. Thereafter, when “PBB” wins and the game shifts to the PBB game state, the lottery is performed for the number of ART games for each unit game until the PBB game state ends. When the PBB gaming state ends, the ART game is started based on the number of ART games obtained by adding the result of the lottery to the initial value (50) of the number of ART games. Although not shown in FIG. 62, the same control is performed when “PBB” is determined as the internal winning combination in the ART game. That is, the ART game number obtained by adding the result of the lottery by adding to the initial value (50) of the ART game number is given as the additional game number.

<Battle CZ>
In a normal game, when any of the bonus combinations “BB1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the “specific condition” is satisfied depending on whether or not a “battle mode lock flag” described later is on. The “battle mode lock flag” indicates that the number of ceiling games (that is, the prescribed number of games played in a normal game without shifting to a game state (ART game, BB game state) advantageous to the player) is a predetermined number of games. It is turned on when it becomes (500 games) or more, or when any of “BB1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during the stay in the “battle mode” in the normal game. When the “battle mode lock flag” is on, the BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB, RT2 gaming state during BB, or RB gaming state during BB) is controlled to “battle CZ”.

  During the battle CZ, a battle effect is performed in which the ally character and the enemy character battle, and as described above, the enemy character's “HP” subtraction lottery is performed, and the enemy character before the BB gaming state ends. When “HP” of the game becomes “0” or less, CZ is successful and the game shifts to ART game after the end of the BB game state. On the other hand, if the BB gaming state ends before the enemy character “HP” becomes “0” or less, CZ fails, the initial value (0) of the number of ceiling games is set, and the game returns to the normal game.

<Normal BB>
In a normal game, when any of the bonus combinations “BB1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination and it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied (that is, the “battle mode lock flag” is off) ), The BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB, RT2 gaming state during BB, or RB gaming state during BB) is controlled to “normal BB”.

  In the normal BB, a card acquisition effect is determined as to whether or not a teammate character acquires a card, and a card acquisition lottery is performed as described above. If the number of cards acquired before the end of the BB gaming state is “8” or more, the game shifts to the ART game after the end of the BB gaming state. On the other hand, if the BB gaming state ends before the number of cards reaches “8” or more, the process proceeds to the item CZ after the BB gaming state ends. It should be noted that during the normal BB (more specifically, during the BB RT0 gaming state), “JAC” is drawn with a high probability (see FIG. 17), and it is assumed that one card can always be obtained when “JAC” is won ( (See FIG. 42). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the item CZ from being transferred when the number of cards is zero. Of course, although the possibility is very small, when the BB gaming state is terminated with 0 cards, the game may be shifted to the ART game after the BB gaming state is terminated.

<Item CZ>
In the normal BB, if the BB gaming state ends before the number of cards reaches “8” or more, the general gaming state (RT2 gaming state or RT0 gaming state) after the end of the BB gaming state is “Item CZ”. To be controlled. The item CZ is performed for the number of cards acquired in the normal BB (that is, the number of item CZ games), and ends when the number of cards becomes “0” (that is, the number of item CZ games is “0”). .

  In item CZ, an effect according to the type of the acquired card (for example, “LV1 card” is a low-expected effect, and “LV7 card” is a high-expected effect), As described above, the lottery for the transition to the ART game is performed with the expectation corresponding to the type of the card. If you win the ART transfer lottery before all the acquired cards are used, CZ will be successful, the number of ART games will be added according to the remaining cards, and the initial number of ART games ( The ART game is started on the basis of the number of ART games to which 50) is added and the result of the lottery is added. On the other hand, when all the cards acquired without winning the ART lottery are used, CZ fails, the initial value (0) of the number of ceiling games is set, and the game returns to the normal game.

<ART game>
When the game is shifted to the ART game, a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player is notified until the number of ART games and the number of ART sets becomes “0”. The player can increase medals by performing a stop operation in accordance with the notification. When the number of ART games and the ART set become “0”, the mode (normal mode or battle mode) in the normal game is determined, the initial value (0) of the ceiling game number is set, and the normal game is returned to. .

(Add BB)
In the ART game, when any of the bonus combinations “BB1 to 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB, RT2 gaming state during BB, or RB gaming state during BB) It is controlled to “Add BB”.

  In the additional BB, a battle effect is performed in which the ally character and the enemy character battle, and as described above, the enemy character's “HP” subtraction lottery is performed, and before the BB gaming state ends, the enemy character's When “HP” is equal to or less than “0”, the state shifts to the special addition state after the end of the BB gaming state. On the other hand, if the BB gaming state ends before “HP” of the enemy character falls below “0”, the game returns to the ART game after the BB gaming state ends.

(Special addition state)
In the added BB, when the “HP” of the enemy character becomes “0” or less before the BB gaming state ends, the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state) after the BB gaming state ends is “ It is controlled to “special added state”. In the special added state, for example, similarly to the PBB game state, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed for each unit game until the special added state ends. In the special added state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 4 games) is set as one set, and at the start or end of one set, a continuous lottery is performed as to whether or not to continue the next set. If it is a win, the number of ART games will be added again for the next set, while if the result of this continuous lottery is not won, the special extra state will end and the game will return to the ART game.

  In this embodiment, when the bonus combination won internally in the ART game is BB1, or BB3 (that is, the same color bonus), or BB2, or BB4 (that is, the different color bonus), the internal winning is performed during the preferential mode. In this case, when it is decided to shift to the special addition state in the subsequent addition BB, the lottery in the special addition state is controlled to the preferential state in which “preferential” is selected. In this preferential state, for example, the probability of winning a continuous lottery (“continuation rate”) as to whether or not to continue the set in the special addition state is preferential (that is, the winning probability is increased). . Note that the preferential state is not limited to this. For example, in the additional lottery for the number of ART games, a relatively large number of additional ART games may be easily determined. When the number of continuous games per set is changed, the number of continuous games that are relatively long It is good also as making it easy to determine.

  Further, the aspect of “continuation rate” is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of predetermined continuation rates (for example, 1%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 90%) determined in advance when the special added state is shifted (or when it is determined to shift) It is good also as determining how many sets of special addition states are continued according to the determined continuation rate. In this case, in the preferential state, if a relatively high continuation rate among the plurality of continuation rates is easily determined, the lottery in the special addition state can be preferentially performed.

(Add the number of bells)
In the ART game, when the above-mentioned number of bell winnings reaches a predetermined number, the number of ART games is added and a lottery is performed. Note that the number of ART games added by the addition of the number of bells is not immediately notified to the player (that is, stocked), but is notified when the number of ART games becomes “0”. However, the number of ART games added by the addition of the number of bells may be immediately notified to the player (for example, a game that has reached a predetermined number of times or the next game).

  Note that the mode of addition in the ART game is not limited to that described above. For example, in the “special added state” or “added the number of bells” described above, it may be determined whether or not the ART set number is added instead of or in addition to the ART game number.

  In the ART game, the number of ART games (or the number of ART sets) may be added according to an opportunity other than the above-described addition opportunity. For example, based on the internal winning combination, the success or failure of the addition (whether or not to win) may be drawn out, and when the winning is made, the number of ART games may be added. In this case, a specific combination that has a lower probability of being determined as an internal winning combination than the “push order small combination” that is the target of the above “adding the number of bells” (for example, “in the ART lot drawing table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49” Bonus bonus combination ”or“ chance item 1 ”and“ chance item 2 ”) are determined as internal winning combinations, and may be added with a specific lottery probability (for example, 10923 / 32768≈1 / 3). It may be determined.

  Also, the “push order small role” that is the target of the above “adding the number of bells” and the specific role described above (for example, “bonus duplicate role” in the ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. Based on a plurality of internal winning combinations including “1” and “chance 2”), the success or failure of the addition (whether or not to win) may be drawn. However, in this case, at least the lottery probability determined to be added when the “push order small part” that is the target of the above “adding the number of bells” is determined as the internal winning combination, as described above. It is desirable that the probability be lower than a specific lottery probability (for example, 32/32768 = 1/1024). Alternatively, when the “push order small part” that is the target of the above “adding the number of bells” is determined as the internal winning part, the success or failure of the extra based on the internal winning part (whether or not to win) is not drawn. It is good.

  In other words, the present embodiment is configured such that the number of ART games (or the number of ART sets) can be increased by a plurality of additional opportunities. With this configuration, the game is more versatile with respect to the addition of the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in the advantageous game state (for example, ART games) in which the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. A lottery can be done.

[Main control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the main control process. The main control process described below is started when the pachislot machine 1 is powered on.

  First, when the pachislot machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 93 executes the power-on process shown in FIG. 64 (S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or the setting has been changed appropriately, and an initialization process is executed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an initialization process at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, data stored in the internal winning combination storage area, the display combination storage area, and the like of the main RAM 95 are cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes medal acceptance / start check processing shown in FIG. 65 (S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process for detecting a medal inserted by the player and a process for detecting a start operation are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value and stores it in a random value storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S13). In the present embodiment, the random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 66 (S14). The main CPU 93 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes lock determination processing (S15). In this lock determination process, determination as to whether or not to perform the above-described “lock” is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop initial setting processing (S16). By this reel stop initial setting process, the various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S17). The start command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as an internal winning combination type, a gaming state type, a lock type and period, and a bonus end number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a game start lock execution process (S18). In this game start lock execution process, based on the determination result of the lock determination process in S15, execution of the game start lock and execution of the reel action during the lock execution (effect based on the reel variation mode) are performed. For example, when “PBB” is won as an internal winning combination (winning number “1” is won), the game is locked for about 30 seconds (the lock timer value is “26853”).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a wait process (S19). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous game (start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. Waiting time to wait is digested. The predetermined time in the wait process, that is, the wait time is set to 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel rotation start process for rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S20). With this reel rotation start process, “01110000” is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 26). Note that the reel rotation start control is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71 (more specifically, the reel control process shown in S324). This interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed at regular intervals (1.1172 ms).

  By controlling the driving of the stepping motor by this interrupt processing, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is made at a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute). It is accelerated until it reaches. Thereafter, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed, the constant speed rotation is maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed and the reel index described above is detected, the stop operation to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is permitted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 ( S21). The reel rotation start command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has been started, for example.

  By receiving this reel rotation start command data, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop control process (S22). By this reel stop control process, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed. Although not shown, in this reel stop control process, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and the generated reel stop command data is stored in the main RAM 95. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. The reel stop command data includes the type of the reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated), the number of sliding pieces, or the planned stop position (that is, the reel is actually scheduled to stop). This is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as a symbol position).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a winning search process (S23). In this winning search process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the effective line is collated with the symbol combination table to identify the symbol combination displayed on the effective line. The

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 23) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 13 to 15) are collated, and if there is a match as a result of the collation, The data corresponding to the matched symbol combination (display combination) is stored in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 22), and the payout number (payout number counter value) associated with the combination of symbols is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a medal payout process of paying out medals of the number corresponding to the acquired payout number counter value as a result of the winning search process (S24). In this medal payout process, medals are paid out and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a state management process shown in FIG. 67 (S25). In this state management process, the transition control of the RT gaming state is mainly executed, and on / off of the output of the external signal from the external concentration terminal board 47 is managed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a lock execution process at the end of the game (S26). In this game end lock execution process, based on the determination result of the lock determination process in S15, execution of the game end lock and the reel action during the execution of the lock (effect based on the reel variation mode) are performed. For example, if “PBB” and “BAR-matched fake rip” are duplicated as the internal winning combination (winning number “2” is won), the game ends for about 27 seconds (the lock timer value is “24167”). A lock is executed. In addition, when “PBB” wins and when the PBB gaming state ends, the game is locked for about 2 seconds (the lock timer value is “1790”), and “BB1 to 4” are awarded. And when the RT0 gaming state during BB, the RT2 gaming state during BB, or the RB gaming state during BB ends, the lock at the end of the game is executed for about 1 second (“895” as the value of the lock timer). In the BB RT game state, when “BB RB” wins, the lock at the end of the game is executed for about 0.3 seconds (the lock timer value is “268”).

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates winning action command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated winning action command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S27). . The winning operation command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the display combination type and the payout number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end check process shown in FIG. 69 (S28). In this bonus end check process, when each end condition (transition condition) defined in the BB gaming state is satisfied, a process according to the end condition (transition condition) is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 70 (S29). In this bonus operation check process, when each start condition (transition condition) of the BB gaming state is satisfied in the general gaming state, when the start condition (transition condition) of the RB in-BB gaming state is satisfied in the BB gaming state, Alternatively, when the re-game operation condition is satisfied in the general game state and the BB game state, processing according to the start condition (transition condition) and the operation condition is executed. After executing the process of step S29, the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S11.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S30). In this determination process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or not by error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores the set value of the pachislot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value when the power is turned off in the main RAM 95 as backup data, and the determination process when the power is turned on (S30). , The set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95 are read out.

  Then, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum calculated from the read set value and the checksum that has been backed up, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison results match.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed-up setting values and the like in the main RAM 95 (S31). As a result, when the backup is normal, the setting value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 95.

  After executing the process of step S31 or when determining that the backup is not normal in step S30 (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the setting change switch (setting key) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1. It is determined whether or not the mold switch 56) is on (S32). If the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is on (YES), the main CPU 93 executes initialization processing when the setting is changed (S33).

  In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area, the display combination storage area, the symbol code storage area, and the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 95 are cleared and the set value Is cleared. Note that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area may not be cleared or may be cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated initialization command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S34). . The initialization command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the presence / absence of setting value change and the setting value, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a set value change process (S35). In this set value changing process, a set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of a reset switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1, and subsequently, The set value selected when the start lever 23 is operated is confirmed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is in the on state (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until a determination result that is not in the on state is obtained. .

  Here, the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is not in the ON state (that is, when the setting change switch is turned from on to off) (NO). Then, initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, and the generated initialization command data is stored in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S37), and processing at power-on is performed. finish.

  In step S32, if the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch (setting key switch 56) is not on (NO), it determines whether the backup is normal (S38). If it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 executes power-on error processing (S39).

  In power-on error processing, the main CPU 93 displays an error display or the like indicating that the backup is not normal. Note that the main CPU 93 does not cancel the error state by an operation of a stop release switch (not shown) or a reset switch (not shown) in the state where the backup is not normal (backup error). Therefore, the error state is canceled only when the setting is newly changed.

  If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 restores the state of the pachislot machine 1 to the state before the power-off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 95. (S40), the power-on process is terminated.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S50). That is, it is determined whether or not a replay role has been won in the previous unit game.

  In step S50, when determining that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 93 executes automatic insertion processing for automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S51). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. A transmission process is executed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the inserted number counter, and the value of the credit counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an automatic insertion interval waiting process in order to set a replay operation recognition time for reliably operating the re-game in the current unit game (S53). In this automatic insertion interval waiting process, “270” is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer (270 interrupts × 1.1172 ms≈301.64 ms). Thus, in this embodiment, when a replay combination is won in the previous unit game, the replay operation recognition time is provided, and the process related to automatic insertion is surely performed.

  The replay operation recognition time is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the replay operation recognition time may be different depending on the number of medals that are automatically inserted (for example, the values “1” to “3” of the automatic insertion counter). Specifically, when the number of automatically inserted medals is “1”, “90” is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and the number of automatically inserted medals is “2”. In some cases, “180” is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and “270” is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer when the number of medals to be automatically inserted is “3”. It is good as well.

  Moreover, it is good also as producing an effect using this replay action recognition time. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, in the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 gaming state during BB, a privilege is given according to the number of consecutive winnings (winning number) of the replay role. Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 gaming state during BB, if the value of the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer is set according to the number of consecutive winnings (winning number) of the replay role, it is locked for each unit game. Performing the effect of similarly stopping the progress of the game (invalidating the player's operation) without performing the decision process (see S15 in FIG. 63) or the lock execution process at the end of the game (see S26 in FIG. 63). Is possible.

  Specifically, for example, in the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 gaming state during BB, when the number of consecutive winnings (winning number) of the replay role is 1 to 4, the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer is set to “270”. ”And the number of consecutive winnings (winnings) for the replay role is 5 to 9 times,“ 540 ”is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer and the number of consecutive winnings for the replaying (winnings) Is 11 to 14 times, “810” is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and when the number of consecutive winnings (winning number) of the replay role is 16 to 19 times, the automatic insertion interval wait time is set When “1080” is set as the time timer and the consecutive winning count (winning count) of the replay role is 10 times, 15 times, 20 times or more, “13” is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer. 0 "is set to.

  By configuring in this way, in a specific gaming state (for example, RT0 gaming state during BB and RT2 gaming state during BB), a predetermined privilege (for example, according to the number of consecutive winnings of a specific combination (for example, replay combination)) When a card acquisition lottery (to be described later) is granted, the same lock can be used without performing lock control (for example, lock determination processing and lock execution processing at the end of the game) for each game by using the replay operation recognition time. Since the effect can be performed, the lock effect can be executed without increasing the control burden.

  In this embodiment, the value of the lock timer (for example, “268”) set when “RB in RB” wins is the minimum value (for example, “270” set as the replay operation recognition time). ") Less than. In other words, when “RB in RB” wins, the time during which the lock effect is executed is configured to be shorter than the replay operation recognition time.

  By configuring in this way, in a specific gaming state (for example, RT0 gaming state during BB and RT2 gaming state during BB), a privilege (for example, a card acquisition described later) is performed according to the number of consecutive winnings of a specific combination (for example, replay combination) When a lottery is given), it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the bonus is less likely to be given by the execution time of the lock effect.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), it accepts medals (S54). For example, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid (not shown) of the selector 66 to form a path so that a medal inserted into the medal slot 21 can pass through the selector 66.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the medal acceptance is prohibited since the medal acceptance is prohibited from the previous unit game. Is not executed, but even if the player has won the replay role in the previous unit game, the acceptance of medals may be permitted.

  After the processing of step S53 or S54 is executed, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number in the main RAM 95 according to the gaming state (S55). In the present embodiment, 3 is set as the maximum value of the inserted number in any gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S56). Here, if it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 93 checks whether the medals are properly inserted or whether the operation to the BET button 22 is performed. Processing is executed (S57). In this medal insertion check process, when a medal is inserted properly or when a medal is inserted by operating the credit to the BET button 22, the value of the inserted number counter according to the number of inserted medals, Alternatively, the value of the credit counter is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. A transmission process is executed (S58).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not medals can be inserted or credited (S59). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 is conditioned on the condition that the value of the insertion number counter is 3 and the value of the credit counter is 50, or that the automatic insertion process of step S51 has been executed. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined that a medal cannot be inserted or credited. When the condition is not satisfied, it is determined that a medal can be inserted or credited.

  If it is determined in step S59 that a medal cannot be inserted or credited (NO), the main CPU 93 prohibits medal acceptance (S60). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a path so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is discharged from the medal payout slot 32 without driving the solenoid of the selector 66.

  If it is determined in step S56 that acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), if it is determined in step S59 that medals can be inserted or credited (YES), or after the processing of step S60 is executed. The main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of medals inserted is a number that can start the game (S61). That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3, which is the maximum value.

  If it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S56. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (S62).

  If it is determined that the start switch 79 is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S56. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start switch 79 is on (YES), the main CPU 93 prohibits medal acceptance (S63) and ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state in the main RAM 95 (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 sets one of the internal lottery tables shown in FIG. 16 or 17 in the main RAM 95 according to the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains a random value stored in the random value storage area (S71). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S70, acquires one lottery value associated with each winning number of the corresponding set value, and draws the lottery value from the random number value. Is subtracted (S72). That is, the main CPU 93 collates whether or not the internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the subtraction result obtained in step S72 is less than 0 (S73). If the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S74).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers in the used internal lottery table have been checked (S75), and if it is determined that all winning numbers have not been checked (NO). The process returns to step S72.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that all winning numbers have been checked (YES), it sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S76). That is, the main CPU 93 determines “losing” as the internal winning combination.

  In step S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), it refers to the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 95 and determines the data pointer for the small role / replay from the winning number. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (S77).

  After executing the processing of step S76 or S77, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18) and determines the internal winning combination based on the value of the small combination / replay data pointer. Is acquired (S78).

  In the process of step S78, the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination / replay is referred to, and 16 bytes indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the data pointer for the small combination / replay acquired in the process of step S76 or S77. Data values are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the internal winning combination acquired in step S78 in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 21) (S79). In the process of step S79, a 16-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S78 is stored in the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 16.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S80). When the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 19) and determines the internal value based on the value of the bonus data pointer. The winning combination is acquired (S81).

  In the process of step S81, the bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and a 16-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of step S76 or S77 is determined. The

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S81 in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) (S82). In the process of step S82, for example, when “PBB” is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S81, bit 0 corresponding to “PBB” in the carryover storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S83). In the process of step S83, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in any of bits 0 to 5 of the carryover combination storage area in step S82.

  If it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the internal winning combination is “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” (S84). ). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the internal winning combination is “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 gaming state as the gaming state (S85). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the RT4 gaming state flag and clears other RT gaming state flags to “0”.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the internal winning combination is not “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” (that is, the internal winning combination is “RB in RB”) (NO), the main CPU 93 is in the BB state as a gaming state. RT2 gaming state is set (S86). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the RT2 gaming state flag during BB, and clears the RT0 gaming state flag during BB to “0”.

  If it is determined in step S80 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), if it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), or the processing of step S85 or step S86 is performed. After the execution, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S87), and ends the internal lottery process. That is, the main CPU 93 reflects the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area in the internal winning combination storing area, and determines the internal winning combination in the unit game.

<State management process>
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the state management process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 is in a PBB gaming state or a normal BB gaming state (that is, a gaming state of one of the RT0 gaming state during BB, the RT2 gaming state during BB, or the RB gaming state during BB). It is determined whether or not there is (S100). When determining that the main CPU 93 is in the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of step S108.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (NO), then, whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, that is, the bonus combination (BB It is determined whether or not the internal winning state (excluding medium RB) is selected (S101). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of step S108.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state in the process of step S101 (NO), the “RT1 transitioning lip 1-16” or “RT1 transitioning symbol 1-8” continues. It is determined whether any combination of symbols is displayed on the active line (S102). When the main CPU 93 determines that any combination of symbols “RT1 transition lip 1-16” or “RT1 transition symbols 1-8” is displayed on the active line (YES), the main CPU 93 sets RT1 as the gaming state. The game state is set (S103), and the process proceeds to step S108. Specifically, “1” is set to the RT1 gaming state flag, and other RT gaming state flags are cleared to “0”.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S102 that any combination of symbols “RT1 transition lip 1-16” or “RT1 transition lip 1-8” is not displayed on the active line (NO Then, it is determined whether or not any combination of symbols “RT2 transition lip 1, 2” is displayed on the active line (S104). If the main CPU 93 determines that any combination of symbols “RT2 transition lip 1, 2” is displayed on the active line (YES), it sets the RT2 gaming state as the gaming state (S105), step The process proceeds to S108. Specifically, “1” is set to the RT2 gaming state flag, and other RT gaming state flags are cleared to “0”.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that any combination of symbols “RT2 transition lip 1, 2” is not displayed on the active line in the process of step S104 (NO), then “RT3 transition” It is determined whether or not any combination of symbols “Rip 1 and 2” is displayed on the active line (S106). If the main CPU 93 determines that any combination of symbols “RT3 transition lip 1, 2” is displayed on the active line (YES), it sets the RT3 gaming state as the gaming state (S107), step The process proceeds to S108. Specifically, “1” is set to the RT3 gaming state flag, and other RT gaming state flags are cleared to “0”.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S106 that any combination of symbols “RT3 transition lip 1, 2” is not displayed on the active line (NO), or after the process of step S107, The external signal output management process described later in the description of FIG. 68 is executed (S108), and the state management process ends.

<External signal output management processing>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the external signal output management process executed in step S108 of the state management process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the external signal 1 functions as a signal for displaying on the external display or the like that the “PBB” winning count (winning count) and the PBB gaming state are being executed. Functions as a signal for displaying on the external display or the like that the number of winnings (winning number) of “BB1 to 4” and the normal BB gaming state is being executed, and the external signal 3 is the execution of the ART game. It functions as a signal for displaying the number of times and the ART game being executed on an external device or the like.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination “PBB” is displayed on the active line (S120). When the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination “PBB” is displayed on the active line (YES), it sets the external signal 1 to ON (S121), and ends the external signal output management process.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination “PBB” is not displayed on the active line (NO), then the symbol combination “BB1 to 4” is the effective line. It is determined whether it is displayed above (S122). If the main CPU 93 determines that any combination of symbols “BB1 to 4” is displayed on the active line (YES), it sets the external signal 2 to ON (S123), and the external signal output management process Exit.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S122 that any combination of symbols “BB1 to 4” is not displayed on the active line (NO), subsequently, “PBB” or “ It is determined whether or not “BB1 to 4” are determined as internal winning combinations (S124). If it is determined that “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination (YES), the process proceeds to step S125, and “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” is determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined that it has not been made (NO), the process proceeds to step S128.

  In the process of step S125, the main CPU 93 sets “0”, which is an initial value, to the ART start check counter. The ART start check counter is data for enabling the main CPU 93 to recognize whether or not an ART game is being executed under the control of the sub CPU 102. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the external signal 3 is on (S126). If it is determined that the external signal 3 is on (YES), the external signal 3 is turned off (S127), and the external signal output management process is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the external signal 3 is not on (that is, off) (NO), the external signal output management process is also terminated. That is, the external signal 3 is turned off when the bonus combination is won internally during the ART game.

  In the process of step S128, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state. If it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (YES), then either “Left RT3 Maintenance Lip”, “Medium RT3 Maintenance Lip”, or “Right RT3 Maintenance Lip” will be won internally. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S129). If it is determined that none of the “left RT3 maintenance lip”, “middle RT3 maintenance lip”, or “right RT3 maintenance lip” has been won internally (NO), the external signal output management process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the “left RT3 maintenance lip”, “middle RT3 maintenance lip”, or “right RT3 maintenance lip” is won internally (YES), then the stop operation sequence of the player is It is determined whether or not the predetermined pressing order is predetermined (S130).

  Here, the “predetermined specific pressing order” means a specific stop operation order in the stop operation order in which the RT3 gaming state is maintained. For example, when “left RT3 maintenance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, if the first stop operation is the left first stop, the RT3 gaming state is set regardless of the order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Although it is maintained (see FIG. 20), in the present embodiment, “middle of right and left” is determined in advance as a specific push order. Similarly, when “middle RT3 maintenance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, “middle left and right” is determined in advance as a specific pushing order, and “right RT3 maintenance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination. Is predetermined as a specific pressing order of “middle right and left”.

  If the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S130 that the player's stop operation order is not a predetermined push order (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the initial value “0” in the ART start check counter. (S131), and the external signal output management process ends. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the stop operation order of the player is a predetermined pressing order (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the ART start check counter (S132), and then starts the ART. It is determined whether or not the check counter is “2” (S133). If it is determined that the ART start check counter is “2” (YES), the external signal 3 is set to ON (S121), and the external signal output management process is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the ART start check counter is not “2” (NO), the external signal output management process is also terminated.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in a specific replay high probability state (for example, RT3 gaming state), a specific combination (for example, “left RT3 maintenance lip”, “middle RT3 maintenance lip”, or “right RT3 maintenance lip” ”) Is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific stop operation order (for example, a predetermined specific press) among the stop operation orders in which a specific replay high probability state (for example, RT3 gaming state) is maintained. A specific state indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an ART game described later) is being executed based on the number of times the stop operation has been performed in order (for example, two times). It is configured to start outputting a signal (for example, the external signal 3).

  In this embodiment, when an ART game is started under the control of the sub CPU 102, a specific stop operation order (for example, a predetermined specific pressing order) is notified for a specific number of times (for example, twice). It is comprised so that. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output the start of a gaming state (for example, an ART game described later) advantageous to the player to the outside.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state in the process of step S128 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the external signal 3 is on (S135). If it is determined that the external signal 3 is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), the external signal output management process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the external signal 3 is on (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not an internal winning combination has been won for the pressing order (S136). If it is determined that the internal combination is not won for the push order small combination (NO), the external signal output management process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal winning combination for the push order is determined (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not a medal has been paid out (S137). In other words, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “missing” has occurred when an internal winning is made in the push order small combination.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that a medal has been paid out in the process of step S137 (YES), the external signal output management process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that no medal has been paid out (NO), the external signal 3 is turned off (S138), and the external signal output management process is terminated. In other words, during the ART game (or after the end of the ART game), if the winning combination is won and “missing” occurs, the external signal 3 is turned off.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a specific signal (for example, the external signal 3) indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an ART game described later) is being executed is output. When the winning combination is won in the push order, but no medal is paid out, the output of this specific signal is terminated. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately output the end of a gaming state (for example, an ART game described later) advantageous to the player to the outside.

<Bonus end check process>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the bonus end check process executed in step S28 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 is in a PBB gaming state or a normal BB gaming state (that is, a gaming state of one of the RT0 gaming state during BB, the RT2 gaming state during BB, or the RB gaming state during BB). It is determined whether or not there is (S150). When determining that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter based on the value of the payout number counter. (S151). Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (S152). That is, it is determined whether or not the update result (subtraction result) by the process of step S151 is less than zero. If it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the process proceeds to step S158.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S152 that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a process at the end of the PBB / BB (S153). In this PBB / BB end process, the PBB gaming state flag is cleared to “0” when the PBB gaming state is ended, and according to the state at the end when the normal BB gaming state ends. The RT0 gaming status flag during BB, the RT2 gaming status flag during BB, or the RB gaming status flag during BB is cleared to “0”. If the RT2 gaming state during BB ends, bit 5 of the carryover combination storage area is cleared to “0” (the internal winning state of “RB during BB” is ended). Further, the external signal 1 or the external signal 2 is turned off.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB RT2 gaming state is over (S154). When the main CPU 93 determines that the RT2 gaming state during BB is over (YES), it sets the RT2 gaming state as the gaming state (S155). In other words, the replay high probability state transitioned in the BB gaming state is taken over to the general gaming state after the end of the BB gaming state. On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that it is not at the end of the BB RT2 gaming state (NO), it sets the RT0 gaming state as the gaming state (S156).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end command transmission process (S157), and ends the bonus end check process. In this bonus end command transmission process, bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, and the generated bonus end command data is stored in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. This bonus end command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the end of the BB gaming state, for example.

  If the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S152 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RB gaming state during BB. (S158). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB in-between gaming state (YES), and if a small role is won in the unit game (that is, if a medal has been paid out), the BB in-between RB game When the winning number counter for counting the number of winnings of the small role in the state and the gaming number counter for counting the number of games in the RB gaming state during BB are decremented by 1, and the small role has not won in the unit game (that is, If no medal has been paid out, the game number counter is decremented by 1 (S159).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning counter or the game counter is “0” (S160). When it is determined that both the winning number counter and the game number counter are not “0” (NO), the bonus end check process is ended. If it is determined that the winning counter or the game counter is “0” (YES), the BB end time processing is executed (S161), and the bonus end check processing is ended. In this BB RB end process, the BB RB gaming state flag is cleared to “0” and the BB RT0 gaming state flag is set to “1”.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S158 that the current gaming state is not the BB gaming state during BB (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state. (S162). When determining that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. If it is determined that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (YES), the PBB gaming state processing is executed (S163), and the bonus end check processing is terminated. In this PBB gaming state process, the PBB gaming state is always a specific RB gaming state (that is, a state in which a lottery value of the PBB gaming state defined in the internal lottery table for BB gaming state shown in FIG. 17 is drawn). It is controlled to become.

  In the present embodiment, the processing of steps S154 to 156 is performed (that is, the gaming state at the end of the BB gaming state is determined), and the winning probability of the replay role in the BB gaming state is inherited in the general gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 93 may be configured to take over the lottery value of the replay combination set at the end of the BB gaming state as it is in the general gaming state. In this case, if the lottery value of the replay role in the RT0 gaming state during BB is set at the end of the BB gaming state during BB (or at the time of winning the “BB during RB”), the above-described steps S154 to S156 are performed. Processing can be omitted.

<Bonus activation check process>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the bonus operation check process executed in step S29 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a PBB gaming state (S170). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state (NO), then the current gaming state is the normal BB gaming state (that is, RT0 during BB, RT2 during BB). It is determined whether or not the gaming state or the BB gaming state during BB) (S171). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal BB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of step S176.

  If the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S171 that the current gaming state is the normal BB gaming state (YES), then whether or not the current gaming state is the BB gaming state during BB. Is determined (S172). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the BB gaming state during BB (YES), the bonus operation check process ends.

  If the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S172 that the current gaming state is not the BB in-RB gaming state (NO), the symbol combination “RB in-RB” is subsequently displayed on the active line. It is determined whether or not (S173). When the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination “RB in RB” is not displayed on the active line (NO), the bonus operation check process is terminated.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S173 that the symbol combination “RB in RB” is displayed on the active line (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a process in the BB during RB operation (S174). In this BB RB operation process, “1” is set to the BB gaming status flag during BB, and “0” is cleared to the RT2 gaming status flag during BB. Further, “8” is set in the winning number counter, and “12” is set in the game number counter. Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S175) and ends the bonus operation check process. That is, the main CPU 93 clears bit 5 of the carryover combination storage area to “0”.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal BB gaming state in the process of step S171 (NO), the main CPU 93 continues to display either of the symbols “PBB” or “BB1 to 4”. It is determined whether the combination is displayed on the active line (S176). When the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination of “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” is not displayed on the active line (NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of step S180.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” is displayed on the active line in the process of step S176 (YES), the process at the time of PBB / BB operation is performed. Is executed (S177). In this PBB / BB operation process, if the symbol combination displayed on the active line is a symbol combination of “PBB”, the PBB gaming status flag is set to “1”, and other gaming status flags (for example, , RT4 gaming state flag) is cleared to “0”, and “297” is set to the bonus end number counter. Further, if the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is any combination of symbols “BB1 to 4”, “1” is set to the RT0 gaming state flag during BB, and other gaming state flags (for example, , RT4 gaming state flag) is cleared to “0”, and the bonus end number counter is set to “44”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area corresponding to the winning bonus combination (S178), executes a bonus start command transmission process (S179), and ends the bonus operation check process. In this bonus start command transmission process, bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, and the generated bonus start command data is stored in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. This bonus start command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the start of the BB gaming state, for example.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S176 that no symbol combination of “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” is displayed on the active line (NO), it is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not any combination of symbols of the replay combination is displayed on the active line (S180). When the main CPU 93 determines that any combination of symbols of the replay combination is displayed on the active line (YES), the main CPU 93 issues an automatic insertion request (that is, a request process for operating the re-game in the next unit game). (S181), the bonus operation check process is terminated. In addition, when it is determined that no symbol combination of any replay combination is displayed on the active line (NO), the bonus operation check process is ended.

<Interrupt processing under main CPU control>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is periodically executed every 1.1172 ms.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 93 executes an input port check process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 (S321). In this input port check process, for example, the presence or absence of signals from various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 93 is confirmed.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores in the main RAM 95 information on on / off edges of various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch (not shown) and information on on / off of various sensors such as a medal sensor (not shown).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes timer update processing (S322). In this timer update process, for example, when the value of the lock timer, the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer or the like is 1 or more, a process of subtracting “1” from the timer value for each interrupt is executed. Next, the main CPU 93 executes communication data transmission processing described later in the description of FIG. 73 (S323). Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel control process (S324). In this reel control process, for example, an acceleration process for accelerating the rotation of each reel is performed by controlling the driving of each stepping motor based on the rotation start request of each reel in the reel rotation start process (S20 in FIG. 63). Then, based on the fact that each reel has reached a predetermined speed (for example, 80 revolutions per minute), a constant speed process for maintaining the predetermined speed is executed by controlling the driving of each stepping motor, and then stopped. Based on the rotation stop request for each reel in the control process (S22 in FIG. 63), the stop process for stopping the rotation of each reel is executed by controlling the driving of each stepping motor.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a lamp / 7SEG driving process (S325). For example, the main CPU 93 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, etc. on various display units. Next, the main CPU 93 restores the register (S326), and terminates the interrupt process that occurs periodically.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the previous interrupt, that is, the state of the input port before one interrupt in the main RAM 95 (S331), and stores the current input port state in the main RAM 95 (S332).

  Thus, by comparing the state of the input port before one interrupt with the current state of the input port, the main CPU 93 can check the state of both input ports. It is checked whether the state has changed, for example, whether the BET button 22, the start lever 23, or the like has been operated.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 95 (S333). For example, the main CPU 93 changed to an on edge when the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 79 was data indicating off before one interrupt, but is currently data indicating on. On-edge information indicating this is stored in the main RAM 95, and the input data assigned to the input port assigned to the start switch 79 is data indicating ON before one interrupt, but is now data indicating OFF. If there is, off-edge information indicating the transition to off-edge is stored in the main RAM 95.

<Communication data transmission processing>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the communication data transmission process executed in step S323 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 decrements the communication data transmission timer by 1 (S340). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the communication data transmission timer is 0 (S341).

  When determining that the communication data transmission timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the communication data transmission process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (S342).

  If it is determined that there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 93 generates no-operation command data, and the generated no-operation command data is assigned to the main RAM 95 as communication data. Store in the storage area (S343).

  The no-operation command data is set with various parameters such as on-edge / off-edge information of various switches and on / off information of various sensors stored in the input port check process described above. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal action against command transmission by preventing an interrupt process in which a command is not transmitted, and to allow the sub CPU 102 to recognize such information so that the operation is originally invalid. An effect can be changed based on an operation (for example, an operation on the BET button 22 during reel rotation).

  If it is determined in step S342 that there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (YES), or after executing the process of step S343, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 14) in the communication data transmission timer. (S344).

  Next, the main CPU 51 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101 (S345). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not transmission of communication data has been completed (S346).

  If it is determined that transmission of communication data has not been completed (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transmission of communication data has been completed (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the communication data storage area to be cleared (S347), and ends the communication data transmission process.

[Sub-control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 89.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing power-on processing of the sub CPU 102 at power-on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S350). In this initialization process, the sub CPU 102 performs error check on the sub RAM 83 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, which is a task group for timer interrupt synchronization, and a sound control task.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 75 (S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, It is a process which performs the process which controls a lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 76 (S352). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 controls the sound output state of the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R and the like. Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task (S353) and ends the power-on process. In the mother task, a main board communication task shown in FIG. 77 and a display control task (not shown) for controlling display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are activated.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task activated in step S351 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S360). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization processing of lamp related data (S361).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for a timer interrupt (S362). In this process, a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization is executed until the sub CPU 102 receives a timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group for command reception interrupt synchronization can be cited. Moreover, a task group (not shown) for power supply interrupt synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like can be given.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 76 (S363). In this process, the task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In this embodiment, the priority order of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization is basically the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task at the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, the processing of steps S372 and S373 is executed in the sound control task shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes lamp data analysis processing that determines the light emission mode of the LED 85 included in the determined presentation data (S364), executes lamp presentation execution processing based on the lamp data (S365), and step The process returns to S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task activated in step S352 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process for sound-related data related to the sound output state of speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a task in the next priority of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization that is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes sound data analysis processing that determines the sound output mode of the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R and the like included in the determined presentation data (S372). A sound effect execution process is performed (S373), and the process of step S371 is executed.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task activated in the mother task activated in step S353 shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 initializes the communication message queue (S380), and checks the received command (S381).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S382). If it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 returns to the process of step S381.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is a legitimate command, creates game information from the received command, and creates it. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S383). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a command analysis process shown in FIG. 78 (S384), and returns to the process of step S381.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in step S384 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102 executes the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79 based on the received command type and information included in the command data (S390), executes the ramp data determination process (S391), and the sound data determination process. Is executed (S392), each determined data is registered (S393), and the command analysis process is terminated.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing executed in step S390 of the command analysis processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an initialization command has been received (S400). If it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization command reception process (S401), and ends the effect content determination process. In the initialization command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as the initialization command is set. For example, the production state is restored or the production state is initialized based on the presence or absence of a setting change. Further, for example, when the setting is changed, the mode in the normal game is determined by lottery.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S402). If it is determined that a medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a medal insertion command reception process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a medal insertion sound is set based on whether or not a medal has been inserted. Further, effect data for displaying a background image corresponding to the mode and the gaming state is set.

  In the medal insertion command reception process, the medal insertion command (see S52 in FIG. 65) transmitted based on the automatic insertion process (see S51 in FIG. 65) being performed (that is, the re-game is activated). Is received, production data for outputting an automatic sound for notifying that the re-game is activated is set. Here, in this embodiment, a predetermined standby time (replay operation recognition time) is set at the time of re-game operation, but the automatic input sound is in the predetermined standby time (replay operation recognition time). Even if it outputs, it is comprised.

  By configuring in this way, even if a standby time (for example, replay operation recognition time) for recognizing the operation of the regame is set, it is possible to inform the player that the regame will operate without delay. Can be recognized.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command has been received (S404). If it is determined that a start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 80 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set. For example, during an ART game, if the internal winning combination is a push forward, production data for notifying the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous to the player is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a reel rotation start command has been received (S406). If it is determined that a reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a reel rotation start sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel stop command has been received (S408). If it is determined that a reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception process (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as a reel stop command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a reel stop sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a lock command has been received (S410). If it is determined that a lock command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a lock command reception process (S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the lock command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as a lock command is set. For example, effect data for displaying an image corresponding to the type of lock is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S412). If it is determined that a winning action command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a winning action command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 88 (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. . In the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command, effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set. For example, effect data for outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout number corresponding to the winning combination is set. Further, for example, when the gaming state is shifted, effect data for displaying a video indicating that fact is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bonus start command has been received (S414). If it is determined that a bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus start command reception process (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus start command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. For example, effect data for displaying the initial value of the bonus end number counter corresponding to the type of bonus to be started is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bonus end command has been received (S416). If it is determined that a bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes bonus end command reception processing described later in the description of FIG. 89 (S417), and ends the effect content determination processing. . In the bonus end command reception process, effect data based on information transmitted as the bonus end command is set. For example, effect data for suggesting a gaming state to be transferred after the bonus ends is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a no-operation command has been received (S418). If it is determined that a no-operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a no-operation command reception process (S419), and ends the effect content determination process.

  In the no-operation command reception process, the effect data may be changed based on information transmitted as a no-operation command. For example, when the effect data determined in the start command reception process is effect data requesting continuous hitting of the BET button 22, the BET button 22 received as a no-operation command is in an on-edge state or an off-edge state. The production data is changed based on the information. On the other hand, if it is determined in S418 that a no-operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the PBB gaming state (S430). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the PBB gaming state is in effect (YES), it refers to the number of added ART games in the PBB shown in FIG. 28 and determines the number of added ART games based on the internal winning combination (S431). Then, the determined number of added ART games is added to the number of ART games (S432), and the process proceeds to step S442.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in step S430 that the PBB gaming state is not in effect (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART gaming is in progress (S433). If the sub CPU 102 determines that an ART game is being played (YES), it executes an ART game process to be described later in the description of FIG. 81 (S434), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S433 that the ART game is not being played (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the battle CZ is being executed (S435). When determining that the battle CZ is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a battle CZ mid-process described later in the description of FIG. 84 (S436), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in step S435 that the battle CZ is not being performed (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the normal BB is being performed (S437). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the normal BB is in progress (YES), it executes the normal BB in-process described later in the description of FIG. 85 (S438), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S437 that it is not in the normal BB (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is in the item CZ (S439). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the item is in the item CZ (YES), it executes the item CZ in-process described later in the description of FIG. 86 (S440), and proceeds to the processing in step S442.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S439 that the item CZ is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a normal game process described later in the description of FIG. 87 (S441), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  Next, if the effect data has not been set yet, the sub CPU 102 sets start effect data corresponding to the internal winning combination or the like (S442), and ends the start command receiving process. In the process of step S442, for example, if the addition BB or the battle CZ is in progress, the start effect data corresponding to the HP subtraction success / failure and the HP subtraction value is set. Start effect data according to the type is set, and if the item is in the item CZ, the start effect data according to the card type to be used and the result of the ART lottery is set. Start performance data corresponding to the internal winning combination is set.

<Processing during ART game>
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the ART gaming process executed in step S434 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets ART game navigation data corresponding to the internal winning combination (S450). In the process of step S450, for example, in the RT0 gaming state, when “push order small combination” is determined as the internal winning combination, “RT transition symbols 1 to 8” are displayed and transition to the RT1 gaming state is stopped. ART game navigation data for which the operation order is not notified is set. In addition, in the RT1 gaming state, when “RT2 transition lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation order in which “RT2 transition lip 1, 2” is displayed to transition to the RT2 gaming state is notified. ART game navigation data to be set is set.

  In addition, in the RT2 gaming state, when “RT2 maintenance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, a stop operation order in which “normal lips 1 to 8” are displayed is displayed in order to maintain the RT2 gaming state. When “RT3 transition lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, “RT3 transition lip 1, 2” will be displayed in order to shift to the RT3 gaming state. The navigation data during ART game in which the stop operation order is notified is set. Further, in the RT3 gaming state, when “RT3 maintenance lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation order in which “normal lips 1 to 8” are displayed to maintain the RT3 gaming state is notified. The navigation data during ART game is set. Further, in the RT1 to 3 gaming states, when the “push order small combination” is determined as the internal winning combination, the medal is increased, and in the RT2 and RT3 gaming states, the RT gaming state is maintained. The navigation data during ART gaming in which the stop operation order in which “1-4”, “cross-up bell”, or “middle bell” is displayed is set. In a unit game in which a bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination and a combination of symbols of the determined bonus combination can be displayed, navigation data during ART game in which the combination of symbols of the determined bonus combination is notified May be set.

  In this embodiment, the current RT gaming state is a low replay probability state (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state), and an RT gaming state in which an ART game is performed (RT3 gaming state). Even if it is an RT game state (RT2 game state) different from), it is assumed that it is managed as being in the “ART game”, but it is determined that the transition to the ART game has been made, and the RT3 game When the state has not been changed, the management may be performed as “ART ready state”, which is a different management state. That is, the RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) in which the ART game is performed and other RT gaming states (for example, RT0 to RT2 gaming state) may be managed by different management states.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB is being added (S451). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional BB is in progress (YES), it executes an extra BB process to be described later in the description of FIG. 82 (S452), and ends the ART gaming process.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in step S451 that the added BB is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not it is in a special added state (S453). If the sub CPU 102 determines that it is in the special extra state (YES), it executes the special extra state process (S454) and ends the ART game process. In the special added state processing, as described above, the continuous lottery of the set in the special added state and the lottery of the number of added ART games are performed.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S453 that it is not in the special addition state (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is on (S455). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the above-described preferential state is set during the ART game. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the preferential mode lock flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S460.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the preferential mode lock flag is not on (that is, is off) in the process of step S455 (NO), the sub CPU 102 continues to internally win the same color bonus (that is, BB1 or BB3). It is determined whether or not it has been done (S456). If it is determined that the same color bonus is won internally (YES), the process proceeds to step S458.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S456 that the same color bonus has not been internally won (NO), then whether the different color bonus (ie, BB2 or BB4) has been internally won during the preferential mode? It is determined whether or not (S457). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the special bonus has been won internally during the preferential mode (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the preferential mode lock flag (S458), and proceeds to the processing of step S460.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the processing of step S457 that the internal bonus is not won for the different color bonus during the preferential mode (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART mode mode lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the lottery result, the mode transition lottery is executed (S459), and the mode in the ART game is set based on the lottery result.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART game number update (subtraction) process (S460). In this ART game number update (subtraction) process, when the ART game is not in the extra BB or in the special extra state and is in the RT3 game state, the ART game number set for each unit game is “1”. Update by subtraction. Therefore, for example, when shifting to the ART game after the end of the PBB gaming state, the number of ART games is not subtracted in the RT0-2 gaming state, and subtraction of the ART game number is started after shifting to the RT3 gaming state. The Rukoto. During the ART game, when the stop operation is performed according to the stop operation procedure different from the stop operation procedure notified by the player, and the RT3 gaming state is changed to the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state is again transferred. Even during this period, the number of ART games is subtracted. Further, in the RT4 gaming state, which is the internal winning state of the bonus combination, the ART game number may not be subtracted and updated, or the ART game number may be subtracted and updated until the internal lottery result is announced.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART game end check process described later in the description of FIG. 83 (S461), and ends the ART game process.

<Additional processing during BB>
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the extra BB in-process executed in step S452 of the ART gaming process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 changes to the push order small combination (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “26” to “37”) or the RB medium small combination (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “45”). It is determined whether or not an internal winning is made (S470). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is given to the push order small combination or the RB medium small combination (YES), the above-described number of possible lotteries is added by “1” (S471). It should be noted that “1” may be added to the number of possible lotteries even when “unquestioned bell” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “38”) is won internally.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S470 that it has not won the push order small combination or the RB medium small combination (NO), or if the process of step S471 is performed, the lottery is possible. It is determined whether or not the number of times is “5” or more (S472). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of possible lotteries is “5” or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 finishes the extra BB process. In other words, when the number of wins for push order or RB medium / small combination is 5, the lottery for shifting to the special addition state during “Addition BB” (ie, “HP” subtraction lottery) The lottery period during which is performed will end.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S472 that the number of lotteries that can be drawn is not “5” or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the above, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed (S473). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (S474). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (YES), it refers to the ART HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 51, determines the HP subtraction value based on the internal winning combination, The determined HP subtraction value is subtracted from the HP value (S475).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S474 that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, not won) (NO), or if the process of step S475 has been performed, It is determined whether the number of consecutive replays is “5” or more (S476). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of consecutive replays is “5” or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the HP consecutive ART subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 52 and based on the enemy type and the number of consecutive replays. Then, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed (S477). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (S478). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the lip consecutive enemy A to C ART subtracting HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 53 or the lip consecutive enemy shown in FIG. Referring to the D ART ART HP subtraction value lottery table, the HP subtraction value is determined based on the number of consecutive replays, and the determined HP subtraction value is subtracted from the current HP value (S479).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is not won (ie, is not won) in the process of step S478 (NO), or when the process of step S479 is performed, It is determined whether the value of HP is “0” or less (S480). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the current HP value is “0” or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on a special added state flag, which is information for shifting to the special added state after the addition BB is finished ( S481), the process of adding BB is terminated. In addition, when it is determined that the current HP value is not “0” or less (that is, “1” or more) (NO), the process of adding BB is ended.

<ART game end check process>
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the extra BB process executed in step S461 of the ART game process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART games is “0” (S490). When it is determined that the number of ART games is not “0” (that is, “1” or more) (NO), the ART game end check process is ended. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART games is “0” (YES), it subsequently determines whether there is a stock of ART games (S491). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an ART game number added by adding the number of bells described above. If the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a stock of the number of ART games (YES), it adds the number of stocked ART games to the number of ART games (S492) and ends the ART game end check process. Although not shown in the drawing, in accordance with the processing in step S492, effect data indicating that there is a stocked ART game number and how many of the stocked ART games were. Is set.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S491 that there is no ART game number stock (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the ART set number is “1” or more (S493). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART sets is “1” or more (YES), it sets an initial value (50) to the number of ART games (S494), and subtracts “1” from the number of ART sets ( S495), the ART game end check process is ended.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S493 that the number of ART sets is not equal to or greater than “1” (ie, “0”) (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the ART end mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. The mode transition lottery is executed (S496), and the mode in the normal game is set based on the lottery result. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal game from the next game (S497), sets an initial value (0) to the number of ceiling games (S498), and ends the ART game end check process. Although not shown, the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART sets is not “1” or more (that is, “0”) in the process of step S493 (NO). When the mode lock flag is on, the preferential mode lock flag is turned off.

<Processing during Battle CZ>
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the process during battle CZ executed in step S436 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S500). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is already determined to shift to the ART game during the battle CZ. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently selects the push order small combination (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “26” to “26”). "37") or RB medium / small combination (the value of the data pointer for small combination / replay is "45") is determined (S501). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination has been made for the push order small combination or RB medium small combination (YES), the above-described number of possible lotteries is incremented by “1” (S502). It should be noted that “1” may be added to the number of possible lotteries even when “unquestioned bell” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “38”) is won internally.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S501 that no internal winning combination has been made for the push order small combination or the RB medium small combination (NO), or if the process of step S502 is performed, the lottery is possible. It is determined whether or not the number of times is “5” or more (S503). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of possible lotteries is “5” or more (YES), the process during the battle CZ ends. In other words, when the number of wins in the push order or RB medium / small combination is 5, the lottery for shifting to the ART game (that is, the subtraction lottery of “HP”) is performed during “Battle CZ”. The lottery period to be performed will end.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S503 that the number of lotterable times is not “5” or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. Then, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed (S504). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (S505). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the character A HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 31, the character B HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 32, or FIG. Referring to the character C HP subtraction value lottery table, the HP subtraction value is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined HP subtraction value is subtracted from the current HP value (S506).

  If the sub-CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is not won (ie, is not won) in the process of step S505 (NO), or if the process of step S506 is performed, the sub-CPU 102 continues to describe above. It is determined whether the number of consecutive replays is “5” or more (S507). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of consecutive replays is “5” or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the lip consecutive HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery is executed (S508). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is won (S509). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the HP consecutive character A HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 35 and the Lip consecutive character B HP subtraction value shown in FIG. With reference to the lottery table or the HP subtraction value lottery table for Lip consecutive character C shown in FIG. 37, the HP subtraction value is determined based on the number of consecutive replays, and the HP subtraction value determined from the current HP value is subtracted. (S510).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is not won (ie, is not won) in the process of step S509 (NO), or if the process of step S510 is performed, It is determined whether the value of HP is “0” or less (S511). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the current HP value is not “0” or less (that is, “1” or more) (NO), the process during the battle CZ is terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current HP value is “0” or less (YES), it turns on the ART winning flag (S512) and sets the initial value (50) to the number of ART games. (S513).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table in the battle CZ during ART C shown in FIG. 38, and executes the ART game number addition lottery based on the number of possible lotteries and the internal winning combination (S514). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART games is added and the lottery is won (S515). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game number extra lottery has been won (YES), it refers to the ART game number extra lottery table during the battle CZ shown in FIG. The number of additional ART games (multiple) is determined, the number of ART games is added according to the determination result (S519), and the process during the battle CZ is terminated. Further, the sub CPU 102 also ends the process during the battle CZ when it is determined that the number of ART games is not won in the additional lottery (that is, non-winning) (NO).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S500 that the ART winning flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART game number on success / failure lottery table in the battle CZ shown in FIG. Based on the number of ART games, a lottery is executed (S516).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART games is added and the lottery is won (S517). If it is determined that the lottery for the number of ART games is won (YES), the number of ART games to be added is determined based on the internal winning combination with reference to the number-of-additions ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. Then, the number of ART games is added according to the determination result (S518), and the process during the battle CZ is ended. Further, the sub CPU 102 also ends the process during the battle CZ when it is determined that the number of ART games is not won in the additional lottery (that is, non-winning) (NO).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the internal winning combination during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ) is determined by lottery (for example, HP When the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, “0” or less), it is decided to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game). It is comprised so that.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the number of consecutive winnings of the specific combination (for example, replay combination) is determined (for example, lottery for HP subtraction value). Is configured to be performed.

  In the present embodiment, it is further determined whether or not to win a lottery (for example, a lottery for HP subtraction value) whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP). It is configured to vary depending on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ), a specified combination (for example, replay) is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, that “JAC” is internally won). The winning probability of the “combination” is increased (for example, transition to the RT2 gaming state during BB).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific numerical value (for example, HP) becomes a specific update result (for example, “0” or less), the number of wins for a predetermined small combination including a push order small combination (for example, The number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) can be added based on the number of times that the lottery is possible.

  With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery with more diversity regarding a lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to an ART game) as to whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. .

  In the present embodiment, a lottery period (for example, the number of possible lotteries) in which whether or not to update the above-described specific numerical value (for example, HP) during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ) is determined. The number of times that a predetermined small combination including a push order small combination is won in a predetermined number of times (in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ)). For example, it is configured to end when 5 times.

  By configuring in this way, even if the player intentionally misses the push order small combination, the lottery period does not increase, so the game store is prevented from suffering unexpected disadvantages. be able to. In other words, with regard to a lottery (for example, a lottery for transition to ART games) whether or not to notify the procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player while appropriately weighing the profits of the player and the amusement store. A rich lottery can be performed.

<Normal BB processing>
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the normal BB processing executed in step S438 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S530). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is already determined to shift to the ART game during the normal BB. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently selects the push order small combination (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “26” to “26”). "37") or RB medium / small combination (the value of the data pointer for small combination / replay is "45") is determined (S531). If the sub CPU 102 determines that an internal winning combination has been made for the push order small combination or RB medium small combination (YES), the above-described number of possible lotteries is incremented by “1” (S532). It should be noted that “1” may be added to the number of possible lotteries even when “unquestioned bell” (the value of the small role / replay data pointer is “38”) is won internally.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S531 that the internal winning combination for the push order small combination or the RB medium small combination has not been won (NO), or if the process of step S532 is performed, the lottery can be continued. It is determined whether or not the number of times is “5” or more (S533). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of possible lotteries is “5” or more (YES), the normal BB processing ends. That is, when the number of wins for push order or RB medium / small combination is 5, the lottery of lottery rights that can receive a lottery for shifting to ART games during “normal BB” (that is, “ The lottery period during which the “card” acquisition lottery) is performed ends.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S533 that the number of lotterable times is not “5” or more (NO), it refers to the card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. An acquisition success / failure lottery is executed (S534). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a card acquisition success / failure lottery has been won (S535). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the card type lottery table shown in FIG. 43 is referred to, the card type is determined based on the internal winning combination, and the determined card type is determined. And the number of cards is updated (S536).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S535 that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, it is not won) (NO), or if the process of step S536 has been performed, It is determined whether the number of consecutive replays is “5” or more (S507). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of consecutive replays is “5” or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the rep consecutive card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery is executed (S538). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a card acquisition success / failure lottery has been won (S539). When determining that the card acquisition success / failure lottery is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the card type lottery table shown in FIG. 45, determines the card type based on the number of consecutive replays, and determines the determined card type. And the number of cards is updated (S540).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S539 that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, it is not won) (NO), or if the process of step S540 has been performed, It is determined whether or not the number of cards is “8” or more (S541). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the current card number is not “8” or more (that is, “7” or less) (NO), the normal BB processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the current card number is “8” or more (YES), it turns on the ART winning flag (S542), and sets the initial value (50) to the number of ART games. (S543).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the extra card game drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 48, executes the lottery drawing of the extra ART game number for each excess card type, and adds the number of ART games according to the lottery result. (S544), and the normal BB processing is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S530 that the ART winning flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the normal BB ART game number addition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the number of ART games, a lottery is executed (S545).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART games is added and the lottery is won (S546). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game number extra lottery is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the normal BB extra ART game number lottery table and determines the additional ART game number based on the internal winning combination. Then, the number of ART games is added according to the determination result (S518), and the normal BB processing ends. Also, the sub-CPU 102 ends the normal BB processing even when it is determined that the number of ART games is not won in the lottery (that is, non-winning) (NO).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined special game state (for example, normal BB), a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) based on the number of consecutive winnings of the specific combination (for example, replay combination). ) A predetermined lottery state (for example, an item) to which a lottery right is granted from among a plurality of types of lottery right (for example, cards) with different expectation levels and the transition to a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) ends In CZ), a transition lottery of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) according to the given lottery right is performed.

  With this configuration, in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), a lottery regarding whether or not to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, an ART game) is indirectly (that is, a lottery right). In comparison with the case where a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is performed only directly, a predetermined special gaming state (for example, It is possible to increase the probability of winning the lottery in the normal BB) (that is, the lottery right lottery).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery right (for example, a card) described above is granted based on the internal winning combination during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB). .

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of lottery rights granted (for example, the number of cards) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, eight), without shifting to a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), It is configured to enter a specific advantageous gaming state (eg, ART gaming).

  With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery with more diversity regarding a lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to an ART game) as to whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), a specific combination (for example, replay) is triggered by transition of the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, that “JAC” is internally won). From a specific combination low probability state (for example, RT0 gaming state during BB) having a low winning probability of a combination (for example, RT2 gaming state during BB) having a high winning probability for a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) When a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) is completed and the state is shifted to a specific high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state during BB), at least a predetermined lottery state ( For example, the item CZ) is configured such that the specific high probability state is inherited (the RT gaming state is set).

  By configuring in this way, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), a transition to a state (for example, RT2 gaming state in BB) in which a specific combination (for example, replay combination) is drawn with high probability Even if it is a case, the interest of the game can be further enhanced without the game becoming monotonous.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery period in which the above-mentioned lottery rights (for example, cards) are lottered during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) (for example, until the number of possible lotteries is five) Period) is defined, and in this lottery period, the number of wins for a predetermined small combination including a push order small combination in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). It is configured to end.

  By configuring in this way, even if the player intentionally misses the push order small combination, the lottery period does not increase, so the game store is prevented from suffering unexpected disadvantages. be able to. In other words, with regard to a lottery (for example, a lottery for transition to ART games) whether or not to notify the procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player while appropriately weighing the profits of the player and the amusement store. A rich lottery can be performed.

<Processing during item CZ>
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the in-item CZ process executed in step S440 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets navigation data in the item CZ corresponding to the internal winning combination (S560). In the process of step S560, in the RT2 gaming state, when “RT2 maintenance lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation in which “normal lips 1 to 8” are displayed to maintain the RT2 gaming state. The navigation data during the ART game in which the order is notified is set, and when “RT3 transition lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, “RT3 transition lip 1, 2” is displayed in order not to transition to the RT1 gaming state. The navigation data in the item CZ in which the stop operation order to be notified is notified is set. In addition, in the RT3 gaming state, when “RT3 maintenance lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, since the transition to the RT1 gaming state is not made, the stop operation order in which “normal lip 1 to 8” is displayed is notified. The item CZ navigation data is set. In addition, in the RT0, RT2 or RT3 gaming state, when the “push order small combination” is determined as the internal winning combination, the medal is increased, and in the RT2 and RT3 gaming states, the RT1 gaming state is not shifted. The navigation data in the item CZ in which the stop operation order in which “upper bell 1 to 4”, “cross-up bell”, or “middle bell” is displayed is set. In the unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the determined bonus combination can be displayed, the navigation data in the item CZ in which the combination of the determined bonus combination is notified. May be set.

  In addition, when the RT gaming state at the start of the item CZ is the RT0 gaming state, when the “push order small combination” is determined as the internal winning combination, the “RT transition symbols 1 to 8” are displayed to enter the RT1 gaming state. In order to shift, the navigation data in the item CZ in which the stop operation order is not notified may be set. In the transitioned RT1 gaming state, when “RT2 transitioning lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, “RT2 transitioning lip 1, 2” is displayed in order to transition to the RT2 gaming state. It is good also as the navigation data in item CZ in which is notified is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. 49, and executes the ART transfer lottery based on the card type and the internal winning combination (S561). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART transfer lottery has been won (S561). If it is determined that the ART transfer lottery has been won (YES), an ART game is set from the next game (S563), and an initial value (50) is set as the number of ART games (S564).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of bell winnings with reference to the lottery drawing lottery table for adding the number of ART games shown in FIG. 55 (S566). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the extra card game drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 48, executes the lottery drawing of the extra ART game number for each excess card type, and adds the number of ART games according to the lottery result. (S567), and the process in the item CZ is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S562 that the ART transfer lottery has not been won (that is, not won) (NO), the item CZ game number is decremented by “1” (S568), and then Then, it is determined whether or not the number of item CZ games is “0” (S569). If it is determined that the item CZ game number is “0” (YES), the normal game is set from the next game (S570), the initial value (0) is set as the ceiling game number (S571), and the item CZ End the middle process. The sub CPU 102 also ends the in-item CZ process when determining that the number of item CZ games is not “0” (that is, “1” or more) (NO).

  In the present embodiment, in the process of step S561, the ART transfer lottery corresponding to the degree of expectation (“LV (level)”) is sequentially performed for the number of acquired cards according to the order of card acquisition in the normal BB. However, the ART transfer lottery mode is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of acquired cards at the time of the item CZ transition, and these cards have different expectations, the ART transition lottery is performed with priority on the cards with higher expectations. The lottery right lottery order changing process for rearranging the order of cards may be performed. Alternatively, a lottery right lottery order changing process for rearranging the order of the cards may be performed so that the ART transfer lottery is performed with priority given to cards with lower expectations. With this configuration, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation in a predetermined period in the item CZ (that is, the first half period or the second half period of the item CZ).

  For example, when there are a plurality of acquired cards at the time of shifting to the item CZ, a lottery right lottery order changing process for performing a lottery for rearranging the order of the cards may be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the period of high expectation in the item CZ.

  Thus, in this embodiment, during the lottery right granting game state (for example, normal BB), a plurality of types of lottery rights (for example, different expectations) for shifting to a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) are provided. A plurality of lottery rights can be granted from among the cards), and in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), specific advantageous game states are sequentially set according to the degree of expectation corresponding to the given lottery right. (For example, an ART game) transfer lottery is performed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery with more diversity regarding a lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to an ART game) as to whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. .

  In the present embodiment, when a lottery for a transition to a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) is won in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), a surplus occurs in the granted lottery rights. Is configured such that the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) can be added based on the surplus lottery rights.

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery right granting game state (for example, normal BB), when the number of lottery rights granted (for example, the number of cards) reaches a predetermined number (for example, eight), a specific advantageous game In this case, a predetermined number of lottery rights are used as surplus lottery rights, and the number of games in a specific advantageous game state (eg, ART game) (eg, ART game) is set. The number of ART games) can be added.

  With such a configuration, even when a lottery right that has not been used for the lottery in a predetermined lottery state occurs, the lottery right is not wasted, and the stop operation is advantageous to the player. Since the number of games in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the game is notified increases, a lottery for determining whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player (for example, ART) The game can be more interesting with regard to the game lottery.

<In-game processing>
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the normal game in-process executed in step S441 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is between PBB flags (S580). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning state of “PBB”. If it is determined that it is between the PBB flags (YES), the normal game process is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that the current time is not between the PBB flags (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the PBB has been internally won (S581). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not “PBB” is determined as the internal winning combination in the current unit game. If it is determined that the PBB is won internally (YES), the initial value (50) is set to the number of ART games (S582), and the number of ART sets (for example, the number of ART sets “3”, “4”, “5” Is selected by lottery (S583), PBB notification effect data for notifying that the PBB has been won internally is set (S584), and the normal game processing is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S581 that the PBB has not been internally won (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is between BB flags (S585). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning state of “BB1 to 4” is in effect. If it is determined that it is between the BB flags (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the notified flag is on (S586). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the bonus combination (BB1 to BB4) has already been won internally and whether or not the type has been notified. If it is determined that the notified flag is on (YES), the normal game process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S586 that the notified flag is not on (that is, off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of precursor games (S587). It is determined whether or not the number of games is “0” (S588). If it is determined that the number of precursor games is “0” (YES), the notified flag is turned on (S589), and a bonus notification (BB1 to BB4) is won internally, and a BB notification for notifying the type Effect data is set (S590), and the normal game process is terminated. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of precursor games is not “0” (that is, “1” or more) (NO), the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S601.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in step S585 that the BB flag is not reached (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not BB is won internally (S591). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any of “BB1 to 4” is determined as the internal winning combination in the current unit game. If it is determined that BB has been won internally (YES), the number of precursor games is determined based on the internal winning combination with reference to the BB winning sign game number lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (S592). Although illustration is omitted, effect data for executing a continuous effect according to the determined number of precursor games is set in accordance with the processing of step S592.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current mode is the battle mode (S593). If it is determined that the current mode is the battle mode (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned on (S594), and the process proceeds to step S588. Also, when it is determined that the current mode is not in the battle mode (that is, in the normal mode) (NO), the process proceeds to step S588. If the internal winning bonus combination is the same color bonus (that is, BB1 or BB3), the process of step S594 may be performed without performing the process of step S593.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S591 that the BB has not been internally won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the final winning combination has been internally won (S595). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not “BAR matching lip” is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that the winning combination has been won internally (YES), an ART game is set from the next game (S596), an initial value (50) is set as the number of ART games (S597), and the number of ART sets (for example, The number of ART sets “2”, “3”, “4”, or “5”) is determined by lottery (S598).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART game number extra lottery bell winning number lottery table shown in FIG. 55, determines the bell winning number (S599), and informs that the finalist has won the internal winning combination. The effect data is set (S600), and the normal game process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S595 that the winning combination has not been won internally (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the battle mode lock flag is on (S601). If it is determined that the battle mode lock flag is on (YES), the normal game process is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the battle mode lock flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the notified flag is on (S602). If it is determined that the notified flag is on (YES), the normal game process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S602 that the notified flag is not on (that is, off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the number of ceiling games (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ceiling games is “500” (S604). If it is determined that the number of ceiling games is “500” (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned on (S605), and the normal game process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ceiling games is not “500” in the process of step S604 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether it is between BB flags (S585). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning state of “BB1 to 4” (including the unit game that has been internally won) is included. If it is determined that it is not between the BB flags (NO), refer to the normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59, execute the mode transition lottery based on the internal winning combination (S607), and based on the lottery result The game mode is set, and the normal game process is terminated. Moreover, also when it is judged that it is between BB flags (YES), the process in a normal game is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of step S595, it is determined whether or not an internal winning is made as a specific replay combination “BAR uniform lip” as a final combination. It is not limited to. For example, it is also possible to determine that a specific small role (for example, chance item 2) is also a confirmed role and determine whether or not this specific small role has been won internally. In addition, when a predetermined combination (for example, normal lip 2) is won internally, it is determined by lottery whether or not to notify about a specific stop operation procedure (for example, right middle left), and it is determined to be notified. In such a case, it may be determined that the winning combination has been won internally. In this case, when a predetermined combination (for example, normal lip 2) is won internally, and a stop operation is performed in a specific stop operation procedure (for example, right middle left), the symbol related to the confirmed combination (For example, “BAR-matched lip”) may be displayed on the active line.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of step S591 that BB has been internally won (YES), and in the process of step S593, it is determined that the current mode is the battle mode ( YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned on in the process of step S594. However, if the notified flag is turned on in the process of step S589, if the current mode is in the battle mode, The mode lock flag may be turned on. In this case, the mode transition lottery may be performed in the process of step S607 until the number of precursor games becomes “0” without performing the process of step S606.

  In this case, if the current mode is in the normal mode even after the number of precursor games becomes “0”, a mode transition lottery may be performed in the process of step S607. With this configuration, it is possible to rescue a player who is not accustomed to pushing. However, in order to deter the act of intentionally avoiding the BB winning by pressing and shifting to the battle mode, the mode transition lottery after the number of precursor games becomes “0” is shown in FIG. It is desirable to make a lottery based on a lottery value having a lower win probability than the lottery value specified in the normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. Furthermore, it is desirable not to notify the player of the result of the mode transition lottery after the number of precursor games is “0”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a special role (for example, BB1 to 4) is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of predictive games until the special winning combination is notified is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the ceiling game number has been reached including the number of precursor games, and if it is determined that the ceiling game number has been reached, the transition is made by winning a special role (for example, BB1 to BB4). When the special game state is controlled to the first special game state (for example, battle CZ) and it is determined that the number of ceiling games has not been reached, the special game that is shifted by winning a special role (for example, BB1 to 4) The state is configured to be controlled to the second special gaming state (for example, normal BB).

  By configuring in this way, even if it has a ceiling function, it is possible for the player to fully enjoy the entertainment of the precursor effect.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when a mode transition lottery is performed based on a predetermined transition condition and a special combination (for example, BB1 to 4) is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific mode (for example, a battle mode) is determined. In this case, the special gaming state that is shifted by winning a special combination (for example, BB1 to BB4) is controlled to the first special gaming state (for example, battle CZ).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a special role (for example, BB1 to 4) is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of precursor games until the special winning combination is notified is determined, Until the number of precursor games is exhausted, a mode transition lottery to a specific mode (for example, a battle mode) may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when a special combination (for example, BB1 to 4) is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of precursor games until the fact that the special winning combination is announced is determined. Until the number of precursor games is exhausted, the first transition probability (for example, the probability based on the lottery value defined in the normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59) is used to enter a specific mode (for example, battle mode). A mode transition lottery is performed, and after the number of predictor games is exhausted, the mode transition to a specific mode (for example, battle mode) is performed with a second transition probability lower than the first transition probability. It is good also as comprising so that a lottery may be performed.

  By configuring in this way, the first special gaming state (for example, battle CZ) which is a relatively advantageous special gaming state until the special role is notified that the internal winning is announced or until the special role is won. Can give you a sense of anticipation.

<Process when receiving a winning action command>
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a winning action command reception process executed in step S413 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not “BB1 to 4” is displayed (S610). That is, the sub PU 102 determines whether any symbol combination of “BB1 to 4” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “BB1 to 4” is displayed (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not an ART game is being played (S611). If it is determined that the ART game is being played (YES), an additional BB is set from the next game (S612), and an initial value of enemy type (enemy A) and an initial value of HP (60) are set (S613). ).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is a stored enemy type or a remaining HP (S614). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the enemy character (enemy type) has been updated in the additional BB before the previous time, or whether the HP (remaining HP) subtracted in the additional BB before the previous time is retained. . If it is determined that there is a stored enemy type or remaining HP (YES), the initial value (enemy A) of the enemy type set in step S613 and the initial value (60) of HP are changed, The stored enemy type or the remaining HP is set (S615), and the winning operation command reception process is terminated. The sub CPU 102 also ends the process when receiving a winning action command when determining that there is no stored enemy type or no remaining HP (NO).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S611 that the ART game is not being played (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the battle mode lock flag is on (S616). If it is determined that the battle mode lock flag is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), the normal BB is set from the next game (S617), and the process for receiving a winning action command is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in step S616 that the battle mode lock flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the battle CZ from the next game (S618), and sets the initial HP value (60). (S619), referring to the character lottery table in the battle CZ shown in FIG. 29, based on the set value, determines the ally character, sets the type of the determined ally character (S620), processing when receiving a winning action command Exit.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S610 that “BB1 to 4” are not displayed (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not a bell is displayed (S621). That is, the sub CPU 102 internally wins the push order small combination, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop operation procedure, and any one of “upper bell 1 to 4”, “cross-up bell”, or “middle bell” is selected. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols is displayed on the active line. In the process of step S621, it is also possible to determine whether or not any combination of symbols “Crossdown Bells 1 to 4” is displayed on the active line by internally winning the unquestioned bell. Good. If it is determined that the bell is not displayed (NO), the winning operation command receiving process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S621 that a bell is displayed (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not an ART game is being played (S622). If it is determined that the ART game is not being played (NO), the winning operation command reception process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S622 that the ART game is being played (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the number of times that the number of winning a bell has been reached has been reached (S623). If it is determined that the number of times of winning the bell has not been reached (NO), the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S623 that the number of times that the Bell prize has been determined has been reached (YES), refer to the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. Then, the lottery is executed by adding the number of ART games (S624). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART games is added and the lottery is won (S625). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game number extra lottery has been won (YES), it refers to the extra ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 57 to determine the number of extra ART games, According to the determination result, the number of ART games is stocked and stored (S626).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S625 that the number of ART games has not been won in the lottery (that is, non-winning) (NO), or if the process of step S626 is performed, With reference to the lottery table for lottery bell wins for the number of ART games shown in FIG. 55, the number of bell wins is determined again (S627), and the process at the time of receiving a winning action command is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player is notified, a predetermined operation target for the stop operation procedure is notified. The number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) can be added in accordance with the number of wins for the small role (for example, bell).

  In the present embodiment, the number of games (for example, an ART game) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) is determined when at least a transition to a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) is determined. Number) is determined so that the number of winnings of a predetermined small role (for example, bell) for which a lottery will be performed is determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery is performed by adding the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) according to the number of winnings of a predetermined small role (for example, Bell). In the event that the number of winnings of a predetermined small role (for example, bell) will be determined, the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) will be added again. It is configured to be.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to increase the number of games in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) without winning a specific small role called “rare role”. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) based on the internal winning combination in the specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game). ) May be configured to be added.

  However, in this case, the specific combination (that is, “rare combination”, for example, “bonus duplicate combination” in the ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. 49, or “chance eye 1” and “chance eye 2”). Is determined as an internal winning combination, the probability that the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) is added is at least a predetermined small role (for example, bell) Is determined to be higher than the probability that the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) will be added.

  With this configuration, the game is more diverse in terms of adding the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in an advantageous game state (for example, an ART game) in which a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified. In addition to being able to make a lottery, it is possible to always give a sense of expectation of an extra in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) by avoiding biasing the extra opportunity.

<Process when receiving bonus end command>
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing bonus end command reception processing executed in step S417 of the effect content determination processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the end of the PBB gaming state (S640). If it is determined that the PBB gaming state has ended (YES), the process proceeds to step S660. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the end of the PBB gaming state (NO), it subsequently determines whether it is at the end of the additional BB (S641). If it is determined that the addition BB is finished (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special addition state flag is ON (S642). If it is determined that the special extra state flag is on (YES), the special extra state flag is turned off (S643), and the enemy type is updated and stored (S644). Here, the enemy type is the enemy A, the enemy B, and the enemy C based on the fact that the HP becomes “0” or less (that is, an effect that the teammate character defeats the enemy character is executed) in the additional BB. , Are updated sequentially in the order of enemy D.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is on (S645). If it is determined that the preferential mode lock flag is on (YES), the preferential mode lock flag is turned off (S646), a special extra state (preferential) is set from the next game (S647), and a bonus end command is received. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the preferential mode lock flag is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), the special extra state (normal) is set from the next game (S648), and the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command is ended. To do. That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to set the special added state to the preferential state based on whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is on.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S642 that the special added state flag is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 stores the current enemy type and the remaining HP (S649). For example, when the enemy B is determined during the additional BB, the enemy B is stored as the enemy type so that the target enemy B is determined again during the next additional BB. Further, when the cumulative HP subtraction value determined during the lottery period in the extra BB is “20”, the remaining HP is set to “40 (60-20)” so that the initial value of the HP in the extra BB is “40”. “40” is stored as the HP. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an ART game from the next game (S650), and ends the process when a bonus end command is received.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S641 that it is not the end of the extra BB (NO), it subsequently determines whether it is the end of the battle CZ (S651). If it is determined that the battle CZ has ended (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned off (S652), and then it is determined whether the ART winning flag is on (S653). If it is determined that the ART winning flag is on (YES), an ART game is set from the next game (S654), and the number of ART games is added to the bell winning lottery table for lottery shown in FIG. The number of wins is determined (S655), the added ART game number display control process is executed (S656), and the bonus end command reception process is terminated.

  In this added ART game number display control process, the added ART game number determined in the process of step S518 in the battle CZ process shown in FIG. 84 and the process in step S519 of the battle CZ process shown in FIG. The added number of added ART games is to be indicated by a similar effect. For example, in the process of step S518 of the process during battle CZ shown in FIG. 84, the number of added ART games is determined to be “50”, and in the process of step S519 of the process during battle CZ shown in FIG. When the number of games (multiple) is determined to be “double”, the number of ART games is “150” including the initial value “50”. In this case, for example, after displaying the initial value “50” of the number of ART games, “+50” is displayed twice or “+100” is displayed, and the number of added ART games is indicated. Become. Further, for example, the total number of ART games “150” may be indicated. That is, in the present embodiment, in a specific gaming state (for example, during the battle CZ), the lottery opportunity (when winning the ART game transition lottery or after the ART game winning) and the lottery method (adding the number of additional ART games) At the end of a specific gaming state (for example, during a battle CZ), even when a plurality of additional lotteries with different numbers of lottery or an additional ART game number) Are configured to display the same.

  It is possible to improve the interest related to the notification of the lottery result by configuring in this way and not clearly indicating which of the extra lotteries has been added.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S653 that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game from the next game (S657) and sets the number of ceiling games. The initial value (0) is set (S658), and the bonus end command reception process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S651 that the battle CZ has not ended (NO), it is determined that the normal BB has ended, and subsequently whether or not the ART winning flag is on is determined. Judgment is made (S659). If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (YES), an ART game is set from the next game (S660), and the number of ART games is added to the bell winning lottery table for lottery shown in FIG. The number of winnings is determined (S661), and the bonus end command reception process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S659 that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), it sets the item CZ from the next game (S662), and sets the number of cards as the item. The number of CZ games is set (S663), and the process at the time of receiving a bonus end command is ended.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the internal winning combination in a predetermined game period (for example, extra BB), is determined by lottery (for example, an HP subtraction value). A lottery), and when this specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, “0” or less), a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a special added state that is a special advantageous gaming state) Is provided.

  In the present embodiment, when a specific numerical value (for example, HP) does not become a specific update result (for example, “0” or less), a predetermined update result (for example, the remaining update result) HP) is held, and in the next predetermined game period, whether or not a specific update result is obtained with respect to the stored predetermined update result is selected.

  By configuring in this way, even if a privilege is not given, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating because the update result of a specific numerical value during a predetermined game period is not wasted. .

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it is determined to shift to a predetermined game period (for example, BB added) (for example, when any of BB1 to BB4 is determined as an internal winning combination), If the preferential conditions (for example, the preferential mode lock flag is on) are satisfied, the preferential state in which the privilege is given preferentially is set, and this preferential state is configured to be maintained until the privilege is given. ing.

  By configuring in this way, even if no privilege is granted, the preferential state is maintained when the privilege is granted in a predetermined game period after the next time, so the interest of the game is reduced. This can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the number of consecutive winnings of the specific combination (for example, replay combination) is determined (for example, lottery for HP subtraction value). Is configured to be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, an added BB), a specific role (for example, a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, “JAC” is internally won)) is used as a transition opportunity. , The replay role) is configured to increase the winning probability (for example, transition to the RT2 gaming state during BB).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery with more diversity with respect to granting a predetermined privilege (for example, a transition to a special added state that is a special advantageous gaming state).

  As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide at least gaming machines according to the first to tenth inventions described below.

[A gaming machine according to the first invention]
In recent years, referring to a point selection table while a bonus (for example, BB) is in operation, points are accumulated by lottery based on an internal winning combination, and a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points Is known (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, since the point indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is simply determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination, There was a problem that the game in operation became monotonous.

  The first invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a lottery with more diversity in relation to a lottery of whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

  The first invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be displayed, and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means is stopped. And a special game letter based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is displayed on the symbol display means. Special gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled (for example, normal BB), and a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player are notified. Advantageous gaming state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game), and advantageous gaming state lottery means (for example, whether to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state) And the sub-CPU 102), and the advantageous game state lottery means has a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) continued for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more by the internal winning combination determination unit in the special game state. Multiple types of lottery rights (e.g., different expectations) for transitioning to the specific advantageous gaming state (e.g., V1 to LV7 cards), a lottery right is granted, and after the special gaming state is ended, a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) is transferred, and in the predetermined lottery state, based on the lottery right granted. The game machine is characterized in that whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is selected by lottery.

  Further, the first invention is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state lottery means further grants the lottery right based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit in the special gaming state. The gaming machine described above.

  In the first invention, the advantageous gaming state lottery means has a number of lottery rights (for example, the number of cards) granted in the special gaming state exceeding a predetermined number (for example, “8”). In the case, the game according to the above, wherein it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state without shifting to the predetermined lottery state (for example, the item CZ) after the special gaming state ends. Machine.

  In the first invention, the special game state control means determines the internal winning combination based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game state (for example, “JAC” is internally won). From a specific combination low probability state where the probability that the specific combination is determined by the means is low (for example, RT0 gaming state in BB), the specific combination high probability state where the specific winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination unit (For example, when the special gaming state ends when the transition is made to the RT2 gaming state during BB), if the transition to the specific role high probability state occurs, at least in the predetermined lottery state, The gaming machine described above, wherein the probability state is inherited (for example, the RT2 gaming state is set in step S155 of FIG. 69).

  According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, a lottery with more diversity can be made regarding a lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to an ART game) whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. It can be carried out.

[A gaming machine according to the second invention]

  In recent years, referring to a point selection table while a bonus (for example, BB) is in operation, points are accumulated by lottery based on an internal winning combination, and a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points Is known (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, since the point indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is simply determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination, There was a problem that the game in operation became monotonous.

  Further, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, the bonus is configured so that the operation ends when a predetermined number of medals are paid out. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined small combination is won during the bonus operation, but it is possible to perform a stop operation so as not to win the predetermined small combination, the number of point lotteries is intentionally increased. As a result, there is a problem that an amusement store may suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

  The second invention is made in view of such a point, and whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player while appropriately weighing the profits of the player and the game store. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a lottery with respect to lottery.

  The second invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be displayed, and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means is stopped. And a special game letter based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is displayed on the symbol display means. Special gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled (for example, normal BB), and a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player are notified. Advantageous gaming state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game), and advantageous gaming state lottery means (for example, whether to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state) And the sub CPU 102), and the special gaming state control means is a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small combination (for example, “push order small combination” and “RB medium small combination”) in the special gaming state ( For example, when the symbol combination of “bell” is displayed on the symbol display means a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), the special game is displayed. The advantageous game state lottery means terminates the state, and in the special game state, the specific winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means during a predetermined lottery period (for example, a period in which the number of lotterable times is less than “5”). A plurality of types of lottery rights (for example, LV1 to LV7 cards) with different degrees of expectation for shifting to the specific advantageous gaming state when (for example, a replay combination) is continuously determined for a specific number of times (for example, 5 times) or more. ) In the predetermined lottery state, and after the special gaming state ends, the specified lottery state (for example, item CZ) is transferred to the specified lottery right in the predetermined lottery state based on the given lottery right. Whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state of the game, and the predetermined lottery period is the number of times that the predetermined winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state The predetermined small combination is not displayed on the symbol display means according to the procedure of the player's stop operation. A gaming machine including a specific small combination (for example, “push order small combination”).

  Further, according to a second aspect of the present invention, the advantageous gaming state lottery means is further based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means during the predetermined lottery period in the special gaming state. The game machine described above, wherein a lottery right is granted.

  In addition, according to a second aspect of the invention, in the advantageous gaming state lottery means, the number of lottery rights (for example, the number of cards) granted in the special gaming state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “8”). In the case, the game according to the above, wherein it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state without shifting to the predetermined lottery state (for example, the item CZ) after the special gaming state ends. Machine.

  In the second invention, the special game state control means determines the internal winning combination based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game state (for example, “JAC” is internally won). The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the probability that the specific combination is determined by means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention, a lottery (for example, to an ART game) as to whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player while appropriately weighing the profits of the player and the game store. The lottery with more diversity can be performed.

[A gaming machine according to the third invention]
In recent years, a point selection table is referred to during a predetermined gaming state (for example, during BB operation), points are accumulated by a lottery based on an internal winning combination, and the player after the predetermined gaming state ends according to the accumulated points There is known a gaming machine that determines whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the user (for example, prior art document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, since the above-described points are simply determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination, whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is determined. There was a problem that the lottery became monotonous.

  The third invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a lottery with more diversity regarding a lottery for determining whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

  The third invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be performed, and a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, a procedure for a stop operation advantageous to the player) Advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to the ART game), and whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous game state Advantageous game state lottery means (for example, sub-CPU 102), and the advantageous game state lottery means shifts to the specific advantageous game state in a predetermined lottery right granting game state (for example, normal BB). A plurality of lottery rights (for example, LV1 to LV7 cards) having different expectations, and a predetermined lottery state (for example, an item) after the predetermined lottery right granting game state is completed. CZ), and in the predetermined lottery state, based on the plurality of lottery rights granted, whether or not to sequentially shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, lottery, and transition to the specific advantageous gaming state If it is decided to do so, the lottery right that was not used in the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is set as a surplus lottery right, Based on Rino lottery right, I said to plus a number of games particularly advantageous gaming state (e.g., executing a lottery plus ART number game shown in step S567 of FIG. 86) that is a game machine according to claim.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, the advantageous game state lottery means has a predetermined number of lottery rights (for example, the number of cards) given in the predetermined lottery right granting game state (for example, “8”). In the case of the above, the specific transition condition is satisfied, and the predetermined number or more of the lottery rights are used as the remaining lottery rights, and the number of games in the specific advantageous game state is added (for example, FIG. The game machine according to the above, wherein the lottery of the number of added ART games shown in step S544 of 85 is executed).

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, the advantageous gaming state lottery means determines the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state to be added according to the expectation degree of the surplus lottery right, and the expectation degree is high. As described above, the number of games in the specific advantageous game state to be added increases (for example, a lottery value specified in the ART card number lottery table shown in FIG. 48). This is a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention, a lottery with more diversity can be obtained with regard to a lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to an ART game) whether or not to notify the procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. It can be carried out.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine according to the third invention, even if a lottery right that has not been used for the lottery in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) occurs, the lottery right does not become useless. Moreover, since the number of games in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stopping operation that is advantageous to the player is notified increases, the procedure of the stopping operation that is advantageous to the player As for the lottery of whether or not to notify (for example, the lottery for the transition to ART game), the interest can be further enhanced.

[A gaming machine according to the fourth invention]
In recent years, referring to a point selection table while a bonus (for example, BB) is in operation, points are accumulated by lottery based on an internal winning combination, and a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points Is known (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, since the point indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is simply determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination, There was a problem that the game in operation became monotonous.

  The fourth invention is made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a lottery with more diversity regarding the lottery of whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

  The fourth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be displayed, and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means is stopped. And a special game letter based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is displayed on the symbol display means. Special game state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled (for example, battle CZ), and a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player are notified. Advantageous gaming state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game), and advantageous gaming state lottery means (for example, whether to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state) , Sub CPU102), wherein the advantageous gaming state lottery means determines a character from a plurality of characters (for example, characters A to C) in the special gaming state, and in the special gaming state, During the lottery period (for example, the period in which the number of lotterable times is less than “5”), Based on the internal winning combination determined by Kuta and the internal winning combination determining means, a first lottery (for example, a lottery in step S504 in FIG. 84) as to whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is performed. And, in the special gaming state, based on the number of times (for example, the number of consecutive replays) in which the determined character and the specific role (for example, the replay role) are continuously determined during the predetermined lottery period, A second lottery for determining whether or not to update the specific numerical value (for example, a lottery in step S508 in FIG. 84) is performed, and in the special gaming state, as a result of the first lottery and the second lottery, When a specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, HP is “0” or less), it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous game state.

  In addition, according to a fourth aspect of the present invention, the special gaming state control means is a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small combination (for example, “push order small combination” and “RB medium small combination”) in the special gaming state (for example, , The symbol combination) related to “Bell” is displayed on the symbol display means a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), the special gaming state is terminated, and the predetermined lottery period is set in the special gaming state. The predetermined winning combination is ended based on the predetermined number of times that the predetermined winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the predetermined winning combination is determined according to the procedure of the player's stop operation. The gaming machine described above, wherein a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small combination includes a specific small combination (for example, “push order small combination”) that is not displayed on the symbol display means.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, the special game state control means determines the internal winning combination based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game state (for example, “JAC” is internally won). The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the probability that the specific combination is determined by means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, a lottery with more variety can be made regarding a lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to an ART game) whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. It can be carried out.

[A gaming machine according to the fifth invention]
In recent years, referring to a point selection table while a bonus (for example, BB) is in operation, points are accumulated by lottery based on an internal winning combination, and a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points Is known (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, since the point indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is simply determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination, There was a problem that the game in operation became monotonous.

  The fifth invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a lottery with more diversity in relation to a lottery for determining whether or not to notify a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

  The fifth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be displayed, and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means is stopped. And a special game letter based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is displayed on the symbol display means. Special game state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled (for example, battle CZ), and a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player are notified. Advantageous gaming state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game), and advantageous gaming state lottery means (for example, whether to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state) And the sub CPU 102), wherein the advantageous gaming state lottery means is determined by the internal winning combination determining means during a predetermined lottery period (for example, a period when the number of lotterable times is less than “5”). Based on the winning combination, whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) (for example, in step S504 of FIG. 84) When the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, HP is “0” or less) as a result of the lottery, it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and the predetermined It is determined whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state based on the number of times that a predetermined small combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means during the lottery period (for example, the number of lottery is possible) 84, determination of step S519 in FIG. 84), and in the predetermined lottery period, the number of times that the predetermined small combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state is a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The gaming machine is characterized in that it is terminated based on the fact that

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, the special game state control means is based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the special game state (for example, the bonus end number counter is less than “0”). The special gaming state is terminated, and the advantageous gaming state lottery means determines that the special gaming state is shifted to the specific advantageous gaming state in the special gaming state, and then the special gaming state is controlled by the special gaming state control unit. Until completion, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, determination in step S518 of FIG. 84) A gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that:

  In the fifth invention, the advantageous game state lottery means adds the number of games in the specific advantageous game state based on the number of times that the predetermined winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. In the case (for example, when the number of added ART games is added by the determination in step S519 in FIG. 84) and the game in the specific advantageous gaming state based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means When the number of times is added (for example, when the number of added ART games is added by the determination in step S518 in FIG. 84), the same display is performed and the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is added. The gaming machine according to the above, further comprising notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for notifying that.

  Further, according to a fifth aspect of the present invention, the advantageous game state lottery means further includes a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) by the internal winning combination determination unit during the predetermined lottery period in the special game state. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein a lottery for determining whether or not to update the specific numerical value is performed based on the number of times determined (for example, the number of consecutive replays).

  According to the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention, a lottery with more diversity can be obtained with regard to a lottery (for example, a lottery for shifting to an ART game) regarding whether or not to notify the procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. It can be carried out.

[A gaming machine according to the sixth invention]
In recent years, based on the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to perform a control for invalidating a player's operation for a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “lock”), and if lock control is performed, Accordingly, a gaming machine that determines whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player is known (for example, prior art document 2: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-201820).

  Further, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 2, it is in the RT1 operating state (hereinafter referred to as “replay low probability state”) or the RT2 operating state (hereinafter referred to as “replay high probability state”). Accordingly, the lock control type is determined using different lottery tables.

  By the way, in the gaming machine as shown in the prior art document 2, there may be a predetermined lottery state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, ART game).

  In the case where such a predetermined lottery state is provided, if there is a possibility that during the predetermined lottery state, there is a possibility of transition from the replay low probability state to the replay high probability state, or from the replay high probability state to the replay low probability state, It becomes necessary to store the lottery table as described above for the gaming state that may be played.

  That is, when the winning probability of a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) fluctuates during a predetermined lottery state, there is a problem that the number of lottery tables increases and the storage area is compressed.

  The sixth invention is made in view of such a point, and the winning probability of the specific combination fluctuates in a predetermined lottery state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Even if there is a possibility, an object is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an appropriate lottery without squeezing a storage area.

  The sixth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means The symbol variation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be performed and the internal winning combination determining means determine the specific combination (for example, “RT2 maintenance lip” )) Is determined with a high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state) and the internal winning combination determining means determines the specific A low probability state (for example, an RT0 gaming state or an RT1 gaming state) in which the probability of determining is low, and the high probability state and the low probability based on a predetermined transition condition being satisfied Probability state control means (for example, state management processing and bonus end check processing by the main CPU 93) for controlling transition between states, and a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, a procedure for a stop operation advantageous to the player) (for example, Advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) for controlling to ART game), and advantageous game state lottery means (for example, sub CPU 102) for drawing whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous game state, The advantageous gaming state lottery means is controlled by the probability state control means to either the high probability state or the low probability state. , A predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) can be executed, and in the predetermined lottery state, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and a specific lottery table (for example, the item shown in FIG. 49) Whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and the specific lottery table is determined with a high probability at least in the specific combination and the low probability state. 49. When a predetermined combination (for example, “losing”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability that it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is defined as the lowest (for example, the item shown in FIG. 49) A lottery value defined in the column “others” in the ART lottery table during CZ).

  According to the gaming machine of the sixth invention, a lottery table used in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART game) advantageous to the player. The number of storage areas can be reduced, and the storage area can be prevented from being compressed.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the player can move from a high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state) in which the probability that a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) is intentionally determined is high. Even if the player is transferred to a low-probability state (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) in which the probability of determining a specific combination is low, an advantageous lottery will not be received. It is possible to appropriately draw whether or not the game state (for example, ART game) that is advantageous to the player is shifted.

  That is, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention, there is a possibility that the winning probability of the specific combination may fluctuate in a predetermined lottery state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Even so, an appropriate lottery can be performed without pressing the storage area.

[A gaming machine according to the seventh invention]
In recent years, during a predetermined game period in which a hero character battles with an enemy character (for example, a battle effect), the action form of the hero character is determined, and a specific numerical value (for example, physical strength point) is determined according to the determined action form. ) And a gaming machine that gives a predetermined privilege (for example, generates a specific game) based on the fact that the update result becomes a specific update result (for example, “0”) is known. (For example, prior art document 3: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-97564).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 3, when a specific numerical value does not become a specific update result in a predetermined game period, the update result in the middle is not reflected at all in the subsequent game. However, since it is wasted, there is a possibility that the interest of the game after the end of the predetermined game period may be reduced.

  In addition, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 3, even when a specific numerical value becomes a specific update result, only a predetermined privilege is given uniformly. There was a problem of lacking.

  The seventh invention is made in view of such a point, and in a predetermined game period, a specific numerical value is updated, and a predetermined privilege is given when the update result becomes a specific update result. In the gaming machine, even if the update result does not become a specific update result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating and to perform more diverse lottery regarding the granting of benefits. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

  In the seventh invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and internal winning combination determining means (for example, main winning combination) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means The symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be performed, and a predetermined advantageous gaming state (for example, Advantageous gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and the sub CPU 10) A process for receiving a winning action command), a bonus giving lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 102) for lottering whether or not to give a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a special added state), and the privilege granting means When a predetermined privilege is granted, a preferential determination means (for example, a sub-subject determining unit) that determines whether to increase the profit given by the predetermined privilege (for example, whether to turn on the preferential mode lock flag) CPU102), and the bonus granting means updates a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the predetermined advantageous gaming state. Whether or not the specific numerical value is specified before the predetermined advantageous gaming state ends as a result of the lottery (for example, the lottery in step S473 in FIG. 82). When the update result (for example, HP is “0” or less), the predetermined privilege is given, and the specific advantageous game state is ended without the specific numerical value being the specific update result. A predetermined update result (for example, remaining HP) that is an intermediate update result is held, and when the predetermined update result is held, the internal winning combination determining means determines in the predetermined advantageous gaming state Based on the determined internal winning combination, whether or not the specific update result is obtained with respect to the predetermined update result is selected by lottery, and the preferential determination means is specified when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. If the preferential condition is established (for example, if the preferential mode lock flag is on), the profit given by the predetermined privilege is increased until the predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means. Decision A gaming machine characterized by

  Further, according to a seventh aspect of the present invention, the special game state control means is based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the special game state (for example, the bonus end number counter is less than “0”). The special gaming state is terminated, and the advantageous gaming state lottery means establishes the specific transition condition in the special gaming state until the special gaming state is terminated by the special gaming state control unit. , Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, determination in step S518 of FIG. 84). The gaming machine described above.

  In addition, according to a seventh aspect of the present invention, the advantageous game control unit is configured such that the symbol variation displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the symbol variation stop control unit, and the first symbol combination (for example, the same color bonus) Based on the fact that the symbol combination) is displayed on the symbol display means, it is controlled to the first advantageous gaming state, and the symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol variation stop control means, Based on the fact that the second symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination related to the different color bonus) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second advantageous gaming state is controlled, and the preferential determination means is the symbol variation The specific preferential condition is established based on being controlled to the first advantageous gaming state by the stop control means (for example, having won the same color bonus internally) It is a gaming machine placement.

  In addition, according to a seventh aspect of the present invention, the bonus grant lottery means further determines the number of times that a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determination unit in the predetermined advantageous gaming state (for example, , The lottery of whether or not to update the specific numerical value based on the number of consecutive replays).

  According to the gaming machine of the seventh invention, a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is updated in a predetermined game period (for example, additional BB), and the update result is a specific update result (for example, HP is “0”). In the case of a gaming machine that gives a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a special added state), even if the update result does not become a specific update result, the interest of the game is reduced. In addition, it is possible to perform a lottery with a greater variety regarding the provision of benefits.

[A gaming machine according to the eighth invention]
In recent years, when a specific small role with a relatively low winning probability called a “rare role” is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific advantage is notified that a procedure for a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. A gaming machine is known in which the number of games in the gaming state (for example, the number of ART games) is added (for example, prior art document 4: JP 2013-220271 A).

  By the way, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 4, if the winning probability is relatively high and a normal small combination for increasing medals in a specific advantageous gaming state is determined as an internal winning combination, the specific advantageous The number of games in the game state is not added.

  Also, from the viewpoint of maintaining an appropriate payout rate, generally, in the gaming machine as shown in the prior art document 4, the above-mentioned specific small role is set to have a very low winning probability. Many.

  Therefore, the specific advantageous game state often ends without the specific small role described above being determined as an internal winning combination. In such a case, the player can play a game in the specific advantageous game state. There was a problem that there was a possibility that it would not be possible to have the expectation of adding the number of times and that the interest of the game would be reduced.

  The eighth invention has been made in view of such a point, and in an advantageous game state in which a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, the number of games can be determined without winning a specific small role. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can give a sense of expectation for addition.

  The eighth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be performed, and a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, a procedure for a stop operation advantageous to the player) Advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to the ART game) and the number of games in the specific advantageous game state is added. An extra lottery means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for lottering whether to perform or not, and when it is determined that the extra lottery means is controlled to the specific advantageous gaming state, , Push order small role) is determined a specific number of winning (for example, Bell winning number), and in the specific advantageous gaming state, the predetermined small number of winnings is the determined specific winning number Whether or not to increase the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the lottery shown in step S624 in FIG. 88 is performed). A gaming machine characterized in that it is a small role to be notified.

  Further, according to an eighth aspect of the present invention, the extra lottery means determines the specific prize based on the fact that the predetermined number of winnings of the predetermined small role is the determined number of specific winnings in the specific advantageous gaming state. The game as described above, wherein when the number of games in the advantageous gaming state is to be added or not, the specific number of winnings is determined again (for example, the lottery shown in step S627 in FIG. 88 is performed). Machine.

  Further, according to an eighth aspect of the present invention, the extra lottery means further includes the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific advantageous gaming state. Whether or not to be added is determined by lottery, and the specific winning combination (for example, “chance eye 1” and “chance eye 2”) different from the predetermined small role is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. The probability determined to increase the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is the specific advantageous gaming state when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. The probability that the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means is higher than the probability determined by adding the number of games of the game. Small combination of a gaming machine according to above, wherein the lower than the probability that is determined as an internal winning combination.

  According to the gaming machine of the eighth invention, in the advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, for example, a specific small role (for example, so-called “rare role”). Even if the player does not win the game, the expectation of adding the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) can be given.

[A gaming machine according to the ninth invention]
In recent years, when a predetermined condition is met in a period when the bonus is not won internally, the ceiling flag is turned on, and the bonus won when the ceiling flag is turned on is a more advantageous bonus game. A gaming machine having a function is known (for example, Prior Art Document 5: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-215990).

  Also, in such a gaming machine, when a bonus is won internally, it is common that a sign effect suggesting an internal winning of the bonus is executed over a plurality of games until the bonus is won.

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, for example, when the bonus is internally won immediately before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the precursor effect is started immediately before the predetermined condition is satisfied. In such a case, the start of the precursor effect, which should originally increase the player's expectation, may rather discourage the player.

  That is, with such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the player may not be able to fully enjoy the entertainment of the precursor effect.

  The ninth invention has been made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine that allows a player to fully enjoy the fun of a precursor effect even when having a ceiling function. With the goal.

  The ninth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be displayed, and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means is stopped. And a special game letter based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is displayed on the symbol display means. (For example, a battle CZ or a normal BB) special gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) and the internal winning combination determination means When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a precursor game number determination unit (for example, determination in step S592 of FIG. 87) for determining the number of precursor games and the precursor game determined by the precursor game number determination unit Based on the number, effect execution means for notifying that the special combination has been determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the final game of the continuous effect, (for example, The liquid crystal display device 11) and the number of games after the end of the special game state are the number of ceiling games (for example, “5 0 ”), and determining means (for example, determination in step S604 of FIG. 87), and the special gaming state control means is determined to have reached the number of ceiling games by the determining means If it is determined, the special game state is controlled to a first special game state (for example, battle CZ), and if the determination means determines that the ceiling game number has not been reached, The gaming state is controlled to a second special gaming state (for example, normal BB), and the determination means notifies that the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the notification unit after the special gaming state ends. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games has been reached based on the number of games that have been played.

  The ninth invention further includes mode determining means (for example, lottery in step S607 in FIG. 87) for determining a mode from a plurality of modes based on whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. In the game in which the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining unit, the mode determined by the mode determining unit is a specific mode (for example, battle mode). In this case, the gaming machine according to the above, wherein the special gaming state is controlled to the first special gaming state regardless of the determination result by the determining means.

  In addition, according to a ninth aspect, in the game until the mode determination unit notifies that the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the effect execution unit, a first transition probability (for example, FIG. 59 based on the lottery value defined in the normal mode transition lottery table shown in 59), it is determined whether or not to shift to the specific mode, and the special execution is determined as an internal winning combination by the effect executing means. In the game after the fact that it has been determined, the specific mode is based on the second transition probability that is lower than the first transition probability and is determined to transition to the specific mode. It is determined whether or not to shift to, the gaming machine described above, characterized in that.

  The ninth aspect of the invention further includes advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) in which a stop operation procedure advantageous for the player is notified. The first special gaming state is a gaming state in which a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and the second special gaming state is whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to the above, which is in a gaming state in which a lottery right (for example, a card) for lottery is to be drawn.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, even if the gaming machine has a ceiling function, the player can sufficiently enjoy the entertainment of the precursor effect.

[A gaming machine according to the tenth invention]
In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is granted based on a replay combination winning a predetermined number of times (for example, prior art document 6: JP 2010-51510 A).

  Further, in recent years, when a specific replay is won, it is determined whether or not to perform a control for invalidating the operation by the player for a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “lock”), and the lock control is performed. A gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given is known (for example, Prior Art Document 2: JP 2009-201820 A).

  By the way, for example, the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 6 may be configured to perform an effect of invalidating the operation by the player for a predetermined period by performing lock control as shown in Prior Art Document 2. .

  However, with such a configuration, each time a replay winning combination is won or whether or not to perform lock control is determined according to the number of consecutive winnings, there is a problem that the control burden increases significantly. It was.

  The tenth aspect of the invention is made in view of such a point, and in a gaming machine that grants a privilege based on the fact that the specific combination has won continuously, the control burden is increased with respect to the grant of the privilege. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an effect of invalidating a player's operation for a predetermined period.

  The tenth aspect of the present invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main winning combination determining unit). Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol variation start control means for starting the variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93), and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the symbol variation to be displayed, and symbol variation displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means is stopped. The next game is based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the specific combination (for example, replay combination) is displayed on the symbol display means. A combination of symbols corresponding to the specific combination is displayed on the symbol display means and the re-game activation means (for example, bonus operation check processing and medal acceptance / start check processing by the main CPU 93) for operating the re-game. Re-game operation waiting time setting for setting a re-game operation waiting time (for example, replay operation recognition time) for operating the re-game until the symbol variation can be started by the symbol variation start control means A privilege that grants a predetermined privilege based on the means (for example, the process of step S53 of FIG. 65) and the number of times that the specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means (for example, the number of consecutive replays). Providing means (for example, the sub CPU 102), and the re-game operation waiting time setting means is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A game machine, characterized in that the serial specific combination is set to the replay operation waiting time corresponding to the number determined in succession.

  Further, the tenth aspect of the invention relates to advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) in which a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified, Notification means (for example, a speaker) for notifying that the re-game is operated by the game operation means, and the notification means is re-executed by the re-game operation means during the re-game operation waiting time. It is possible to notify that the game is activated (for example, it is possible to output an automatic throwing sound), and the privilege granting means determines the number of times that the specific winning combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Based on the above, a lottery right (for example, a card) for giving a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is given as the predetermined privilege. It is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machines according to these inventions, it is possible to perform an effect (for example, a lock effect) that invalidates the operation by the player for a predetermined period without increasing the control burden with respect to the provision of the privilege.

  According to a tenth aspect of the present invention, the symbol change stop control means stops the change in the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and a symbol combination corresponding to a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is displayed in the symbol display means. Special gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) for controlling to a special gaming state (for example, normal BB) based on the displayed, The special gaming state control means, in the special gaming state, the internal winning combination determining means by the internal winning combination determining means based on the fact that the internal winning combination determining means has determined the transition combination (for example, RB in BB) as the internal winning combination. Transition to a specific role high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state during BB) with a high probability that the specific role is determined, and the specific role high In the rate state, based on the fact that the symbol variation displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the symbol variation stop control unit, and the symbol combination corresponding to the transition combination is displayed on the symbol display unit, The special winning combination determining means shifts to a specific combination low probability state (for example, RB gaming state during BB) where the probability that the specific combination is determined is low, and the privilege granting means is configured to perform the internal winning combination in the special gaming state. When the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the determination unit is a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) or more, the predetermined privilege is given, and the re-game operation waiting time setting unit When the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the combination determining means is less than the predetermined number, the first re-game operation waiting time (for example, the value of the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer) "270"), and when the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determination means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is longer than the first re-game operation waiting time A second re-game operation waiting time (for example, “540” as the value of the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer) is set, and is displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means in the specific role high probability state. The symbol change is stopped and a combination of symbols corresponding to the transition combination is displayed on the symbol display means, so that a specific time shorter than the first re-game operation waiting time (for example, lock The game according to the above, further comprising lock control means (for example, lock execution processing at the end of the game by the main CPU 93) for performing lock control as a timer value "268") Machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in a special gaming state (for example, normal BB), it is difficult to give a predetermined privilege, and an effect (for example, a lock effect) for invalidating an operation by a player for a predetermined period. The player can be recognized by the execution time.

  According to the gaming machine according to the tenth invention, in the gaming machine that grants a privilege based on the fact that a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) wins continuously, the control burden is not increased with respect to the provision of the privilege. An effect (for example, a lock effect) that invalidates the operation by the player for a predetermined period can be performed.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated using this embodiment, this invention is not limited to this. That is, the specific configuration of each means included in the present invention is not limited to the example adopted in the above-described embodiment, and can be arbitrarily modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 are employed as the symbol display means, but a configuration using a liquid crystal display device instead of or in addition to this may be used. That is, it is also possible to display the pattern image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in a variable manner. The display window 4 is configured as a plurality of display windows 4L, 4C, 4R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and is arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. A part of the selected pattern may be displayed.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the internal winning combination determining means, the main CPU 93 obtains the random number value generated by the random number generator 98 and performs the internal lottery process. At the same time, a random number value may be obtained using a random number generation circuit (not shown) built in the main CPU 93.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, a start switch 79 that detects an operation on the start lever 23 is employed as a start operation detecting unit that detects a player's start operation, and a stop operation that detects a player's stop operation is employed. As the detection means, the stop switch substrate 80 that detects the operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R is employed, but a touch panel switch may be used instead of or together with this.

  Further, for example, the various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 93 or the sub CPU 102 shown in the present embodiment may be appropriately changed in the management mode without departing from the gist of the present invention. Can do. For example, various counters and various timers managed by “addition” may be managed by “subtraction”. In this case, whether or not “to be greater than or equal to” is determined by “to be less than or equal to”. The determination as to whether or not “exceeds” and the determination as to “exceeding to” shall be read as the determination as to whether or not “less than”. In addition, for example, various counters and various timers managed by “subtraction” may be managed by “addition”. The determination of whether or not “is more than” is read, and the determination of “less than” is read as the determination of “exceeding”.

  Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 93 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 without departing from the gist of the present invention. The various counters and various timers managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 93 without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Further, for example, various game states managed by the control of the main CPU 93 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Various game states managed by the control of the main CPU 93 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 93 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Note that all the inventions described in this embodiment can be applied to all pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention.

1 Pachi-slot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4 Display window (design display area)
23 Start lever 19L, 19C, 19R Stop button 91 Main control circuit 101 Sub control circuit 93 Main CPU
95 Main RAM
101 Sub CPU
103 Sub RAM

Claims (3)

A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns;
An internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination;
Symbol variation start control means for starting variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means;
A symbol variation stop control means for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means;
Based on the fact that the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol change stop control means and the combination of symbols corresponding to the specific role is displayed on the symbol display means, the replay is performed in the next game. Re-game actuating means to be actuated;
A re-game operation for operating the re-game from when the symbol combination corresponding to the specific combination is displayed on the symbol display means until the symbol variation can be started by the symbol variation start control means. Re-game operation waiting time setting means for setting a waiting time;
A privilege granting unit for granting a predetermined privilege based on the number of times that the specific winning combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining unit;
Informing means for informing that the re-game is operated by the re-game operating means ,
The re-game operation waiting time setting means can set the re-game operation waiting time according to the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determination means ,
The informing means can notify that the re-game is operated by the re-game operation means during the re-game operation waiting time . Further comprising a beneficial gaming state control hand stage procedure advantageous stop operation is controlled to a particular advantageous gaming state is informed to the player,
Before SL privilege granting means, based on the number of times the particular combination by the internal winning combination determination means is determined continuously, as the specific privilege, whether lottery shifting to the particularly advantageous gaming state The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a lottery right to be performed is given. A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns;
An internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination;
Symbol variation start control means for starting variation of symbols displayed on the symbol display means;
A symbol variation stop control means for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means;
Based on the fact that the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol change stop control means and the combination of symbols corresponding to the specific role is displayed on the symbol display means, the replay is performed in the next game. Re-game actuating means to be actuated;
Based on the fact that the change of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is displayed on the symbol display means, the special game state is controlled. Special gaming state control means ;
A re-game operation for operating the re-game from when the symbol combination corresponding to the specific combination is displayed on the symbol display means until the symbol variation can be started by the symbol variation start control means. Re-game operation waiting time setting means for setting a waiting time;
A privilege granting unit for granting a predetermined privilege based on the number of times that the specific winning combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining unit ,
The special gaming state control means includes
In the special gaming state, based on the fact that the transition winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the specific winning combination high probability state in which the specific winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means is high. To
In the specified high probability state, the change in the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol change stop control means, and the symbol combination corresponding to the transition combination is displayed on the symbol display means. On the basis of the internal winning combination determining means, the specific combination is determined to be low probability that the specific combination is determined to be low,
The privilege granting unit grants the predetermined privilege when the number of times the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determination unit is a predetermined number or more in the special gaming state,
The re-game operation waiting time setting means includes:
When the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determination means is less than the predetermined number of times, a first re-game operation waiting time is set,
When the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determination means is equal to or more than the predetermined number, a second re-game operation waiting time longer than the first re-game operation waiting time is set. Set,
In the specified high probability state, the change in the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol change stop control means, and the symbol combination corresponding to the transition combination is displayed on the symbol display means. based on the time shorter than the first replay operation latency, Yu Technical machine you, further comprising a locking control means for performing lock control.

Images